Strategy ConsultationStrategy & DiscoveryIncluded scope and billingStrategy Consultation$875 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 60-minute strategy session: Discuss one defined business or communications problem with up to three client participants.
- 1 decision memo: One page of recommendations, agreed priority and next useful decision.
- 1 existing engagement credit: Existing engagement credit: $700 when a related engagement begins within 60 days, under the existing product terms.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization and one defined decision; up to three client participants.
- Pages, words and records
- One short intake form; one-page written recommendation; no separately scoped research report.
- Formats
- Video or telephone meeting; PDF memo.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute paid session; asynchronous intake is included, with no separate discovery call.
- Client inputs
- One business question, essential context and one designated approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Existing scheduling target: within five business days, subject to accepted calendar availability. Deliver the one-page recommendation within 2 business days after the scheduled 60-minute session and complete inputs.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated factual clarification of the memo within the agreed problem; a new problem or another strategy session is additional work.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm problem and intake
- Conduct 60-minute session
- Deliver decision memo
Separate costs and exclusions- Implementation of recommended work
- Legal, tax or financial opinions
- Additional strategy sessions
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingStrategy Consultation$875 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 60-minute strategy session: Discuss one defined business or communications problem with up to three client participants.
- 1 decision memo: One page of recommendations, agreed priority and next useful decision.
- 1 existing engagement credit: Existing engagement credit: $700 when a related engagement begins within 60 days, under the existing product terms.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization and one defined decision; up to three client participants.
- Pages, words and records
- One short intake form; one-page written recommendation; no separately scoped research report.
- Formats
- Video or telephone meeting; PDF memo.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute paid session; asynchronous intake is included, with no separate discovery call.
- Client inputs
- One business question, essential context and one designated approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Existing scheduling target: within five business days, subject to accepted calendar availability. Deliver the one-page recommendation within 2 business days after the scheduled 60-minute session and complete inputs.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated factual clarification of the memo within the agreed problem; a new problem or another strategy session is additional work.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm problem and intake
- Conduct 60-minute session
- Deliver decision memo
Separate costs and exclusions- Implementation of recommended work
- Legal, tax or financial opinions
- Additional strategy sessions
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $875 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Annual Strategy RetainerStrategy & DiscoveryIncluded scope and billingAnnual Strategy Retainer$2,000 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 1 monthly 90-minute working session: One business or marketing priority reviewed with up to four client participants.
- 1 quarterly written check-in: Every third service month, up to three pages reviewing decisions, priorities and next actions.
- 4 advisory requests per month: Four asynchronous requests per month on the agreed strategy; each covers one question, up to three client-supplied source pages and one written response up to 300 words. The accepted order states the business-day response schedule.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization; standing email and text advisory channels; up to four meeting participants.
- Pages, words and records
- Four proposed bounded advisory requests per month; one three-page quarterly written check-in. Existing standing-access commitments preserved.
- Formats
- Video meeting; email or agreed workspace; PDF or shared document.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute strategy session each month; first session establishes priorities.
- Client inputs
- Monthly priorities, decision context, existing results and one approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly delivery cycles begin within 5–10 business days of the scheduled start; request response timing is agreed in the proposal after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm monthly priorities
- Hold monthly working session
- Respond to bounded advisory requests
- Deliver quarterly written check-in every third service month
Separate costs and exclusions- Execution of separate marketing campaigns
- Unlimited or emergency access
- Legal, tax and investment advice
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingAnnual Strategy Retainer$2,000 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 1 monthly 90-minute working session: One business or marketing priority reviewed with up to four client participants.
- 1 quarterly written check-in: Every third service month, up to three pages reviewing decisions, priorities and next actions.
- 4 advisory requests per month: Four asynchronous requests per month on the agreed strategy; each covers one question, up to three client-supplied source pages and one written response up to 300 words. The accepted order states the business-day response schedule.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization; standing email and text advisory channels; up to four meeting participants.
- Pages, words and records
- Four proposed bounded advisory requests per month; one three-page quarterly written check-in. Existing standing-access commitments preserved.
- Formats
- Video meeting; email or agreed workspace; PDF or shared document.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute strategy session each month; first session establishes priorities.
- Client inputs
- Monthly priorities, decision context, existing results and one approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly delivery cycles begin within 5–10 business days of the scheduled start; request response timing is agreed in the proposal after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm monthly priorities
- Hold monthly working session
- Respond to bounded advisory requests
- Deliver quarterly written check-in every third service month
Separate costs and exclusions- Execution of separate marketing campaigns
- Unlimited or emergency access
- Legal, tax and investment advice
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,000 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Discovery and Brief WritingStrategy & DiscoveryIncluded scope and billingDiscovery and Brief Writing$3,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 4 stakeholder interviews: Up to 45 minutes each with client-selected participants.
- 1 source-material review: Up to 50 supplied pages, two current communication channels and three competitors.
- 1 creative brief: Up to 10 pages with objective, audience, positioning, message hierarchy, deliverables, constraints and approval roles.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization, one project brief, up to four stakeholders and two existing communication channels.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to 50 input pages; one brief up to 10 pages; three competitor examples.
- Formats
- PDF and editable document.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute kickoff, up to four 45-minute interviews and one 45-minute brief review.
- Client inputs
- Existing strategy, audience evidence, past creative, decision constraints, stakeholder availability and named approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 1–2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Collect inputs and interview schedule
- Complete up to four interviews and desk review
- Draft creative brief
- Consolidate feedback and deliver final brief
Separate costs and exclusions- Market survey recruitment
- Campaign production
- Additional organizations or separate briefs
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingDiscovery and Brief Writing$3,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 4 stakeholder interviews: Up to 45 minutes each with client-selected participants.
- 1 source-material review: Up to 50 supplied pages, two current communication channels and three competitors.
- 1 creative brief: Up to 10 pages with objective, audience, positioning, message hierarchy, deliverables, constraints and approval roles.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization, one project brief, up to four stakeholders and two existing communication channels.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to 50 input pages; one brief up to 10 pages; three competitor examples.
- Formats
- PDF and editable document.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute kickoff, up to four 45-minute interviews and one 45-minute brief review.
- Client inputs
- Existing strategy, audience evidence, past creative, decision constraints, stakeholder availability and named approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 1–2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Collect inputs and interview schedule
- Complete up to four interviews and desk review
- Draft creative brief
- Consolidate feedback and deliver final brief
Separate costs and exclusions- Market survey recruitment
- Campaign production
- Additional organizations or separate briefs
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Marketing AuditStrategy & DiscoveryIncluded scope and billingMarketing Audit$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 cross-channel audit: Review website, organic search, up to three social profiles, one email platform and one advertising account.
- 1 prioritized findings report: Up to 20 pages with evidence and a three-priority action plan, plus an ordered supporting backlog.
- 1 measurement inventory: Up to 15 existing measures or tracking events, with data gaps recorded.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization, one website/domain, three social profiles, one email platform and one ad account.
- Pages, words and records
- Website sample up to 25 pages; up to 90 days of supplied performance data; up to five competitors.
- Formats
- PDF report and editable issue backlog.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff and one 60-minute findings presentation.
- Client inputs
- Read-only analytics/account access, existing objectives, campaign history and authorized access to supplied reports.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm audit access and samples
- Review channels and evidence
- Rank findings
- Present action backlog
Separate costs and exclusions- Implementing audit recommendations
- Independent financial audit
- Paid audience research
- Guaranteed revenue or ranking improvements
How the engagement begins: Checkout requests a place on the production calendar. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and scope before work begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate the audit, the payment is refunded in full. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMarketing Audit$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 cross-channel audit: Review website, organic search, up to three social profiles, one email platform and one advertising account.
- 1 prioritized findings report: Up to 20 pages with evidence and a three-priority action plan, plus an ordered supporting backlog.
- 1 measurement inventory: Up to 15 existing measures or tracking events, with data gaps recorded.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization, one website/domain, three social profiles, one email platform and one ad account.
- Pages, words and records
- Website sample up to 25 pages; up to 90 days of supplied performance data; up to five competitors.
- Formats
- PDF report and editable issue backlog.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff and one 60-minute findings presentation.
- Client inputs
- Read-only analytics/account access, existing objectives, campaign history and authorized access to supplied reports.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm audit access and samples
- Review channels and evidence
- Rank findings
- Present action backlog
Separate costs and exclusions- Implementing audit recommendations
- Independent financial audit
- Paid audience research
- Guaranteed revenue or ranking improvements
How the engagement begins: Checkout requests a place on the production calendar. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and scope before work begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate the audit, the payment is refunded in full. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Brand AuditStrategy & DiscoveryIncluded scope and billingBrand Audit$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 brand evidence review: Review one existing identity, message set and customer-facing asset sample.
- 5 competitor brand comparisons: Evaluate publicly observable positioning, visual conventions and messages for five selected competitors.
- 4 audience interviews: Up to 30 minutes each with client-recruited participants.
- 1 brand audit report: Up to 20 pages with message clarity findings and prioritized recommendations.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization and brand; five competitors; four client-recruited interview participants.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to 30 supplied brand assets or pages reviewed; report up to 20 pages.
- Formats
- PDF report, visual evidence board and editable recommendation list.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff, four 30-minute interviews and one 60-minute findings presentation.
- Client inputs
- Current brand files, customer context, prior research and participant recruitment/consent.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm brand sample and participants
- Review assets and competitors
- Conduct interviews
- Present prioritized brand findings
Separate costs and exclusions- Identity redesign
- Trademark clearance
- Statistically representative market research
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBrand Audit$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 brand evidence review: Review one existing identity, message set and customer-facing asset sample.
- 5 competitor brand comparisons: Evaluate publicly observable positioning, visual conventions and messages for five selected competitors.
- 4 audience interviews: Up to 30 minutes each with client-recruited participants.
- 1 brand audit report: Up to 20 pages with message clarity findings and prioritized recommendations.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization and brand; five competitors; four client-recruited interview participants.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to 30 supplied brand assets or pages reviewed; report up to 20 pages.
- Formats
- PDF report, visual evidence board and editable recommendation list.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff, four 30-minute interviews and one 60-minute findings presentation.
- Client inputs
- Current brand files, customer context, prior research and participant recruitment/consent.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm brand sample and participants
- Review assets and competitors
- Conduct interviews
- Present prioritized brand findings
Separate costs and exclusions- Identity redesign
- Trademark clearance
- Statistically representative market research
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Trademark Line or SloganBrand & IdentityIncluded scope and billingTrademark Line or Slogan$2,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 5 tagline candidates: Five distinct written options addressing one approved positioning brief.
- 1 selected final tagline: One refined line, up to 12 words, with usage rationale.
- 1 preliminary USPTO availability check: Document a public-record search for the selected line, query/date and observed potentially similar marks; attorney review remains separate.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one product or business positioning brief, one jurisdictional search source (USPTO).
- Pages, words and records
- Five candidates; one final line up to 12 words; up to two pages of rationale/search notes.
- Formats
- Editable text and PDF.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery interview and one 30-minute shortlist review.
- Client inputs
- Brand positioning, prohibited terms, audience, intended goods/services and existing marks.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve naming brief
- Present five candidates
- Refine one selection
- Document preliminary USPTO search
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal trademark clearance or registrability opinion
- Trademark filing
- Guarantee of availability, registration or enforceability
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingTrademark Line or Slogan$2,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 5 tagline candidates: Five distinct written options addressing one approved positioning brief.
- 1 selected final tagline: One refined line, up to 12 words, with usage rationale.
- 1 preliminary USPTO availability check: Document a public-record search for the selected line, query/date and observed potentially similar marks; attorney review remains separate.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one product or business positioning brief, one jurisdictional search source (USPTO).
- Pages, words and records
- Five candidates; one final line up to 12 words; up to two pages of rationale/search notes.
- Formats
- Editable text and PDF.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery interview and one 30-minute shortlist review.
- Client inputs
- Brand positioning, prohibited terms, audience, intended goods/services and existing marks.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve naming brief
- Present five candidates
- Refine one selection
- Document preliminary USPTO search
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal trademark clearance or registrability opinion
- Trademark filing
- Guarantee of availability, registration or enforceability
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Color Palette and Type System OnlyBrand & IdentityIncluded scope and billingColor Palette and Type System Only$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 supporting color palette: Six specified colors with primary/secondary roles and HEX/RGB/CMYK approximations.
- 1 type pairing: One heading family and one body family, including specified weights and fallback stacks.
- 1 usage sheet: Up to six pages showing existing-logo pairings, type hierarchy and contrast observations.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One existing logo system and one brand; no logo redesign.
- Pages, words and records
- Six color specifications; two font families; up to six usage pages.
- Formats
- PDF guide; ASE palette when supported; font license/source links; no font redistribution without permission.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery meeting and one 30-minute review.
- Client inputs
- Vector logo files, current brand use, target media and font license or preferred licensing budget.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inspect existing logo and media needs
- Propose palette and type pairing
- Review contrast and sample uses
- Deliver specifications
Separate costs and exclusions- Logo redraw or redesign
- Custom font development
- Full brand guidelines
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingColor Palette and Type System Only$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 supporting color palette: Six specified colors with primary/secondary roles and HEX/RGB/CMYK approximations.
- 1 type pairing: One heading family and one body family, including specified weights and fallback stacks.
- 1 usage sheet: Up to six pages showing existing-logo pairings, type hierarchy and contrast observations.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One existing logo system and one brand; no logo redesign.
- Pages, words and records
- Six color specifications; two font families; up to six usage pages.
- Formats
- PDF guide; ASE palette when supported; font license/source links; no font redistribution without permission.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery meeting and one 30-minute review.
- Client inputs
- Vector logo files, current brand use, target media and font license or preferred licensing budget.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inspect existing logo and media needs
- Propose palette and type pairing
- Review contrast and sample uses
- Deliver specifications
Separate costs and exclusions- Logo redraw or redesign
- Custom font development
- Full brand guidelines
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Wordmark OnlyBrand & IdentityIncluded scope and billingWordmark Only$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 3 wordmark concepts: Three distinct typographic directions for one approved business name.
- 1 final wordmark: One selected wordmark with horizontal primary and one compact arrangement, in positive, reversed and single-color variants.
- 1 delivery package: Organized SVG, PDF, PNG and JPEG exports with a two-page usage sheet.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One business name, one brand and one final wordmark; no separate symbol system.
- Pages, words and records
- Three initial concepts; two final arrangements; usage sheet up to two pages.
- Formats
- SVG/PDF vectors; PNG transparent exports at 512, 1024 and 2048 px longest edge; JPEG preview.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery and one 30-minute concept presentation.
- Client inputs
- Approved name/spelling, audience, references and known trademark or font restrictions.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 3 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two refinements of the selected wordmark are included, preserving the current promise. Each refinement uses one consolidated feedback set within the approved direction; a replacement name or concept is a written scope change.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve wordmark brief
- Present three concepts
- Complete two refinements of selected concept
- Package final vectors and previews
Separate costs and exclusions- Business naming
- Standalone logo symbol
- Legal trademark clearance
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingWordmark Only$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 3 wordmark concepts: Three distinct typographic directions for one approved business name.
- 1 final wordmark: One selected wordmark with horizontal primary and one compact arrangement, in positive, reversed and single-color variants.
- 1 delivery package: Organized SVG, PDF, PNG and JPEG exports with a two-page usage sheet.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One business name, one brand and one final wordmark; no separate symbol system.
- Pages, words and records
- Three initial concepts; two final arrangements; usage sheet up to two pages.
- Formats
- SVG/PDF vectors; PNG transparent exports at 512, 1024 and 2048 px longest edge; JPEG preview.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery and one 30-minute concept presentation.
- Client inputs
- Approved name/spelling, audience, references and known trademark or font restrictions.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 3 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two refinements of the selected wordmark are included, preserving the current promise. Each refinement uses one consolidated feedback set within the approved direction; a replacement name or concept is a written scope change.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve wordmark brief
- Present three concepts
- Complete two refinements of selected concept
- Package final vectors and previews
Separate costs and exclusions- Business naming
- Standalone logo symbol
- Legal trademark clearance
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Brand Guidelines DocumentBrand & IdentityIncluded scope and billingBrand Guidelines Document$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 brand guidelines document: Up to 24 designed pages documenting existing marks, clear space, palette, typography, imagery examples, voice/tone and correct/incorrect use; deliver PDF plus web-readable version.
- 8 application examples: Eight simple examples using existing brand assets, incorporated into the document.
- 1 asset inventory: Up to 30 supplied brand files checked and indexed for practical use.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One existing brand; up to 30 supplied files; guidance for web, social and basic print use.
- Pages, words and records
- Guidelines up to 24 pages; eight application examples.
- Formats
- PDF and web-readable HTML version, plus editable source as specified in proposal.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute guidelines review.
- Client inputs
- Approved identity assets, license records, current use examples and factual brand rules.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory existing brand files
- Draft rules and application examples
- Review with approval owner
- Deliver guidelines and index
Separate costs and exclusions- Creating a new logo or brand strategy
- Trademark clearance
- Producing final campaign collateral
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBrand Guidelines Document$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 brand guidelines document: Up to 24 designed pages documenting existing marks, clear space, palette, typography, imagery examples, voice/tone and correct/incorrect use; deliver PDF plus web-readable version.
- 8 application examples: Eight simple examples using existing brand assets, incorporated into the document.
- 1 asset inventory: Up to 30 supplied brand files checked and indexed for practical use.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One existing brand; up to 30 supplied files; guidance for web, social and basic print use.
- Pages, words and records
- Guidelines up to 24 pages; eight application examples.
- Formats
- PDF and web-readable HTML version, plus editable source as specified in proposal.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute guidelines review.
- Client inputs
- Approved identity assets, license records, current use examples and factual brand rules.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory existing brand files
- Draft rules and application examples
- Review with approval owner
- Deliver guidelines and index
Separate costs and exclusions- Creating a new logo or brand strategy
- Trademark clearance
- Producing final campaign collateral
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $4,500 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Logo System, StarterBrand & IdentityIncluded scope and billingLogo System, Starter$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 2 identity concept routes: Two proposed wordmark-plus-icon directions for one brand.
- 1 final starter logo system: One wordmark and one complementary icon or monogram; primary horizontal and stacked lockups with positive, reversed and single-color versions.
- 1 support palette and type pairing: Five specified colors and one heading/body font pairing, with web/print specifications.
- 1 quick-use guide: Up to eight pages with spacing, minimum-size examples and export index.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand and approved name; two concept routes; one final system.
- Pages, words and records
- Five palette colors; two font families; guide up to eight pages.
- Formats
- SVG/PDF vector masters; transparent PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG previews.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute concept review.
- Client inputs
- Approved name, brand audience/positioning, competitive references and existing rights constraints.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 3–4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve identity brief
- Present two concept routes
- Refine one wordmark/icon system
- Deliver guide and exports
Separate costs and exclusions- Naming
- Custom illustration library
- Legal trademark search/filing
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLogo System, Starter$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 2 identity concept routes: Two proposed wordmark-plus-icon directions for one brand.
- 1 final starter logo system: One wordmark and one complementary icon or monogram; primary horizontal and stacked lockups with positive, reversed and single-color versions.
- 1 support palette and type pairing: Five specified colors and one heading/body font pairing, with web/print specifications.
- 1 quick-use guide: Up to eight pages with spacing, minimum-size examples and export index.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand and approved name; two concept routes; one final system.
- Pages, words and records
- Five palette colors; two font families; guide up to eight pages.
- Formats
- SVG/PDF vector masters; transparent PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG previews.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute concept review.
- Client inputs
- Approved name, brand audience/positioning, competitive references and existing rights constraints.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 3–4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve identity brief
- Present two concept routes
- Refine one wordmark/icon system
- Deliver guide and exports
Separate costs and exclusions- Naming
- Custom illustration library
- Legal trademark search/filing
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Naming and TaglineBrand & IdentityIncluded scope and billingNaming and Tagline$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 10 name candidates: Ten candidates for one business, product or line naming brief; three finalists with rationale.
- 6 tagline candidates: Six lines supporting the selected name or existing approved name.
- 1 final name and tagline pair: One selected name and one line with rationale and spelling guidance.
- 1 preliminary availability report: Document public USPTO and domain/handle observations for three shortlisted names, with date and query limitations.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One naming brief and brand; three shortlisted names receive preliminary checks.
- Pages, words and records
- Ten candidate names, three finalists, six proposed tagline candidates; final rationale/search report up to six pages.
- Formats
- Editable text and PDF; no account or domain registration included.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute shortlist presentation.
- Client inputs
- Goods/services, intended markets, existing marks, naming restrictions and authorized decision maker.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve naming criteria
- Develop candidate names/lines
- Shortlist and perform preliminary research
- Deliver approved pair and search observations
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal clearance, filing or trademark opinion
- Domain purchases or reserved handles
- Guarantee of availability or registration
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingNaming and Tagline$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 10 name candidates: Ten candidates for one business, product or line naming brief; three finalists with rationale.
- 6 tagline candidates: Six lines supporting the selected name or existing approved name.
- 1 final name and tagline pair: One selected name and one line with rationale and spelling guidance.
- 1 preliminary availability report: Document public USPTO and domain/handle observations for three shortlisted names, with date and query limitations.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One naming brief and brand; three shortlisted names receive preliminary checks.
- Pages, words and records
- Ten candidate names, three finalists, six proposed tagline candidates; final rationale/search report up to six pages.
- Formats
- Editable text and PDF; no account or domain registration included.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute shortlist presentation.
- Client inputs
- Goods/services, intended markets, existing marks, naming restrictions and authorized decision maker.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve naming criteria
- Develop candidate names/lines
- Shortlist and perform preliminary research
- Deliver approved pair and search observations
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal clearance, filing or trademark opinion
- Domain purchases or reserved handles
- Guarantee of availability or registration
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Brand RefreshBrand & IdentityIncluded scope and billingBrand Refresh$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 existing-mark refinement: Refine one existing logo direction with two presentation alternatives; preserve the approved name and basic brand architecture.
- 1 updated support system: Six-color palette, one heading/body pairing and four sample brand applications.
- 1 refresh guide and export set: Up to 12 pages documenting the changed mark, palette, typography and migration notes.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One existing brand and logo family; four sample uses, no separate subbrands.
- Pages, words and records
- Two refinements proposed as alternatives; one selected refresh; guide up to 12 pages.
- Formats
- SVG/PDF vectors; transparent PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG; PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute direction review.
- Client inputs
- Original vector files, evidence of existing equity, current usage inventory and font/image rights.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Assess retained brand equity
- Present refinement alternatives
- Finalize support system
- Deliver refreshed assets and transition notes
Separate costs and exclusions- New brand architecture or business name
- Full rebrand from a blank brief
- Updating all deployed signs, pages or collateral
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBrand Refresh$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 existing-mark refinement: Refine one existing logo direction with two presentation alternatives; preserve the approved name and basic brand architecture.
- 1 updated support system: Six-color palette, one heading/body pairing and four sample brand applications.
- 1 refresh guide and export set: Up to 12 pages documenting the changed mark, palette, typography and migration notes.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One existing brand and logo family; four sample uses, no separate subbrands.
- Pages, words and records
- Two refinements proposed as alternatives; one selected refresh; guide up to 12 pages.
- Formats
- SVG/PDF vectors; transparent PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG; PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute direction review.
- Client inputs
- Original vector files, evidence of existing equity, current usage inventory and font/image rights.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Assess retained brand equity
- Present refinement alternatives
- Finalize support system
- Deliver refreshed assets and transition notes
Separate costs and exclusions- New brand architecture or business name
- Full rebrand from a blank brief
- Updating all deployed signs, pages or collateral
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $8,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Logo System, StandardBrand & IdentityIncluded scope and billingLogo System, Standard$11,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 3 identity concept routes: Three distinct proposed directions for one approved name.
- 1 standard logo system: One wordmark, one icon, horizontal and stacked lockups and one compact submark, each with positive, reversed and single-color versions. Includes favicon export.
- 1 palette and typography system: Eight specified colors, two font families and defined heading/body hierarchy.
- 1 practical usage guide: Eight pages with spacing, minimum size, correct/incorrect use and practical application examples.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand and name; no separately named subbrands.
- Pages, words and records
- Three proposed concepts; eight colors; two font families; eight-page usage guide.
- Formats
- SVG/PDF masters; PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG previews; PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery, one 60-minute concept review and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Approved positioning/name, intended media, reference examples and rights/license constraints.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve identity criteria
- Present three directions
- Refine selected system
- Develop usage guide
- Handoff final exports
Separate costs and exclusions- Naming
- Photography production
- Legal trademark clearance or filing
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLogo System, Standard$11,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 3 identity concept routes: Three distinct proposed directions for one approved name.
- 1 standard logo system: One wordmark, one icon, horizontal and stacked lockups and one compact submark, each with positive, reversed and single-color versions. Includes favicon export.
- 1 palette and typography system: Eight specified colors, two font families and defined heading/body hierarchy.
- 1 practical usage guide: Eight pages with spacing, minimum size, correct/incorrect use and practical application examples.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand and name; no separately named subbrands.
- Pages, words and records
- Three proposed concepts; eight colors; two font families; eight-page usage guide.
- Formats
- SVG/PDF masters; PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG previews; PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery, one 60-minute concept review and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Approved positioning/name, intended media, reference examples and rights/license constraints.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve identity criteria
- Present three directions
- Refine selected system
- Develop usage guide
- Handoff final exports
Separate costs and exclusions- Naming
- Photography production
- Legal trademark clearance or filing
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $11,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Logo System, PremiumBrand & IdentityIncluded scope and billingLogo System, Premium$21,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 3 identity concept routes: Three developed routes for one brand.
- 1 premium identity system: One wordmark, one icon, horizontal/stacked lockups, one compact submark, positive/reversed/single-color variants, 10-color palette and two-family typography hierarchy.
- 1 imagery and voice direction: Two visual moodboards using properly attributed references and up to four pages of voice principles/sample language.
- 1 brand guide: 24 pages, preserving the current minimum of 20 pages, including five starter applications: business card, letterhead and three social templates, plus asset index.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, approved name and identity system; five production-ready starter application designs.
- Pages, words and records
- Three proposed concepts; 10 colors; two font families; two moodboards; 24-page guide; five starter applications.
- Formats
- SVG/PDF masters; PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG previews; PDF guide; reference attribution list.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute discovery workshop, one 60-minute concept review and one 45-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Approved strategy, audience evidence, existing identity/name, intended applications and rights constraints.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve identity and voice brief
- Review three concept routes
- Finalize marks and support system
- Build guide and usage examples
- Handoff indexed assets
Separate costs and exclusions- Business naming
- Original photography shoot
- Trademark legal clearance
- Printing/manufacture of the five included application designs
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLogo System, Premium$21,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 3 identity concept routes: Three developed routes for one brand.
- 1 premium identity system: One wordmark, one icon, horizontal/stacked lockups, one compact submark, positive/reversed/single-color variants, 10-color palette and two-family typography hierarchy.
- 1 imagery and voice direction: Two visual moodboards using properly attributed references and up to four pages of voice principles/sample language.
- 1 brand guide: 24 pages, preserving the current minimum of 20 pages, including five starter applications: business card, letterhead and three social templates, plus asset index.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, approved name and identity system; five production-ready starter application designs.
- Pages, words and records
- Three proposed concepts; 10 colors; two font families; two moodboards; 24-page guide; five starter applications.
- Formats
- SVG/PDF masters; PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG previews; PDF guide; reference attribution list.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute discovery workshop, one 60-minute concept review and one 45-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Approved strategy, audience evidence, existing identity/name, intended applications and rights constraints.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve identity and voice brief
- Review three concept routes
- Finalize marks and support system
- Build guide and usage examples
- Handoff indexed assets
Separate costs and exclusions- Business naming
- Original photography shoot
- Trademark legal clearance
- Printing/manufacture of the five included application designs
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $21,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Full Brand Identity PackageBrand & IdentityIncluded scope and billingFull Brand Identity Package$31,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 premium identity scope: Includes the complete proposed gcm-1104 Premium logo system, palette, typography, imagery/voice direction, 24-page guide and five starter applications; charged once within this package.
- 1 naming and tagline engagement: Includes the proposed gcm-1108 candidate, shortlist and preliminary availability process for one final name/tagline pair; charged once within this package.
- 1 brand story: Up to 1,000 words plus a 150-word summary.
- 12 custom brand-library assets: Six original simple icons, three social templates and three document/cover templates, in one selected editable design tool.
- 1 photography direction and reference shoot: One visual/shot-direction brief and one reference shoot up to 120 minutes at one agreed accessible local setting; 10 edited reference images for brand direction. Client approvals/permissions and any separately priced venue/equipment must be identified in scope.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand and one approved name; one shared design workspace; 12 library assets.
- Pages, words and records
- Premium guide 24 pages; brand story up to 1,150 words across two lengths; 12 library assets; 10 reference-shoot images.
- Formats
- Identity vector/raster exports; PDF guide; editable library in one agreed tool; editable story.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute strategy/naming workshop, one 60-minute naming review, one 60-minute identity review and one 60-minute library handoff.
- Client inputs
- Brand/audience evidence, naming criteria, intended applications, existing rights and one approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 8–10 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve naming and brand brief
- Select name after preliminary checks
- Develop premium identity
- Write story and build 12 assets
- Handoff complete library
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal trademark clearance or filing
- Additional subbrands
- Printing and paid stock libraries
- Campaign photography or video beyond the included reference shoot
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingFull Brand Identity Package$31,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 premium identity scope: Includes the complete proposed gcm-1104 Premium logo system, palette, typography, imagery/voice direction, 24-page guide and five starter applications; charged once within this package.
- 1 naming and tagline engagement: Includes the proposed gcm-1108 candidate, shortlist and preliminary availability process for one final name/tagline pair; charged once within this package.
- 1 brand story: Up to 1,000 words plus a 150-word summary.
- 12 custom brand-library assets: Six original simple icons, three social templates and three document/cover templates, in one selected editable design tool.
- 1 photography direction and reference shoot: One visual/shot-direction brief and one reference shoot up to 120 minutes at one agreed accessible local setting; 10 edited reference images for brand direction. Client approvals/permissions and any separately priced venue/equipment must be identified in scope.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand and one approved name; one shared design workspace; 12 library assets.
- Pages, words and records
- Premium guide 24 pages; brand story up to 1,150 words across two lengths; 12 library assets; 10 reference-shoot images.
- Formats
- Identity vector/raster exports; PDF guide; editable library in one agreed tool; editable story.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute strategy/naming workshop, one 60-minute naming review, one 60-minute identity review and one 60-minute library handoff.
- Client inputs
- Brand/audience evidence, naming criteria, intended applications, existing rights and one approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 8–10 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve naming and brand brief
- Select name after preliminary checks
- Develop premium identity
- Write story and build 12 assets
- Handoff complete library
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal trademark clearance or filing
- Additional subbrands
- Printing and paid stock libraries
- Campaign photography or video beyond the included reference shoot
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $31,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Website Maintenance, Small SiteWeb Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingWebsite Maintenance, Small Site$625 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 managed website per month: Weekly backups with backup-job review and a monthly restore-readiness check; routine compatible plugin/core security updates with a recorded smoke check.
- 2 small content-change requests per month: New-order allowance: 2 consolidated requests across at most 2 existing pages, 500 supplied words and 4 supplied image replacements total each month; existing layouts and links only. Historical agreement entitlements remain as contracted.
- 1 monthly service log: Backup/update status, completed edits and unresolved issues.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One existing WordPress site and domain, one production environment; staging if already available.
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed qualification: up to 15 public pages and 15 plugins; 2 new-order change requests across 2 pages, 500 supplied words and 4 image replacements per month.
- Formats
- Existing site formats; written maintenance log; encrypted backup storage in approved infrastructure.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute onboarding review; monthly written status, no standing meeting.
- Client inputs
- Authorized access, current hosting/backup details, license records and prioritized edits with approved copy.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly service cycles; onboarding within 5 business days after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inspect access and backup path
- Perform weekly backups and routine updates
- Apply approved edits
- Issue monthly log
Separate costs and exclusions- New pages or design changes
- Emergency response or uptime guarantee
- Malware cleanup and major compatibility repairs
- Hosting and license fees
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingWebsite Maintenance, Small Site$625 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 managed website per month: Weekly backups with backup-job review and a monthly restore-readiness check; routine compatible plugin/core security updates with a recorded smoke check.
- 2 small content-change requests per month: New-order allowance: 2 consolidated requests across at most 2 existing pages, 500 supplied words and 4 supplied image replacements total each month; existing layouts and links only. Historical agreement entitlements remain as contracted.
- 1 monthly service log: Backup/update status, completed edits and unresolved issues.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One existing WordPress site and domain, one production environment; staging if already available.
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed qualification: up to 15 public pages and 15 plugins; 2 new-order change requests across 2 pages, 500 supplied words and 4 image replacements per month.
- Formats
- Existing site formats; written maintenance log; encrypted backup storage in approved infrastructure.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute onboarding review; monthly written status, no standing meeting.
- Client inputs
- Authorized access, current hosting/backup details, license records and prioritized edits with approved copy.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly service cycles; onboarding within 5 business days after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inspect access and backup path
- Perform weekly backups and routine updates
- Apply approved edits
- Issue monthly log
Separate costs and exclusions- New pages or design changes
- Emergency response or uptime guarantee
- Malware cleanup and major compatibility repairs
- Hosting and license fees
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $625 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Website Maintenance, Store or Large SiteWeb Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingWebsite Maintenance, Store or Large Site$1,900 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 managed store or larger site per month: Weekly backups, automated uptime monitoring, routine plugin/core security patches and post-update smoke checks.
- 6 small content-change requests per month: New-order allowance: 6 consolidated requests across at most 6 existing pages, 1500 supplied words and 12 supplied image replacements total each month; existing layouts and links only. Historical agreement entitlements remain as contracted.
- 1 monthly status/check-in: Written service log and 30-minute client check-in.
- 1 quarterly performance review: Every third service month, review agreed page speed and operating trends in one 45-minute review with a two-page summary.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One WordPress/WooCommerce or supported store site, one domain and one existing staging environment.
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed qualification: up to 100 public pages, 250 SKUs and 30 plugins; 6 new-order change requests across 6 pages, 1500 supplied words and 12 image replacements per month.
- Formats
- Existing site formats; PDF status/performance summary; approved backup/monitoring tools.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding, one 30-minute monthly check-in and one 45-minute quarterly review.
- Client inputs
- Hosting/store access, test payment method approved for sandbox verification, licenses and supplied edits.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly service cycles; onboarding within 5 business days after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inspect backups and operating risks
- Run weekly maintenance and monitoring checks
- Apply approved edits
- Report monthly and review performance quarterly
Separate costs and exclusions- New checkout/payment architecture
- Emergency incident response or service-level guarantee
- Custom extension development
- Hosting/platform charges
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingWebsite Maintenance, Store or Large Site$1,900 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 managed store or larger site per month: Weekly backups, automated uptime monitoring, routine plugin/core security patches and post-update smoke checks.
- 6 small content-change requests per month: New-order allowance: 6 consolidated requests across at most 6 existing pages, 1500 supplied words and 12 supplied image replacements total each month; existing layouts and links only. Historical agreement entitlements remain as contracted.
- 1 monthly status/check-in: Written service log and 30-minute client check-in.
- 1 quarterly performance review: Every third service month, review agreed page speed and operating trends in one 45-minute review with a two-page summary.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One WordPress/WooCommerce or supported store site, one domain and one existing staging environment.
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed qualification: up to 100 public pages, 250 SKUs and 30 plugins; 6 new-order change requests across 6 pages, 1500 supplied words and 12 image replacements per month.
- Formats
- Existing site formats; PDF status/performance summary; approved backup/monitoring tools.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding, one 30-minute monthly check-in and one 45-minute quarterly review.
- Client inputs
- Hosting/store access, test payment method approved for sandbox verification, licenses and supplied edits.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly service cycles; onboarding within 5 business days after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inspect backups and operating risks
- Run weekly maintenance and monitoring checks
- Apply approved edits
- Report monthly and review performance quarterly
Separate costs and exclusions- New checkout/payment architecture
- Emergency incident response or service-level guarantee
- Custom extension development
- Hosting/platform charges
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,900 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Landing Page (One Page Site)Web Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingLanding Page (One Page Site)$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 custom landing page: One responsive WordPress or static page with up to eight sections and one primary conversion path.
- 1 contact form or conversion link: Up to six fields with one recipient route or one existing checkout/booking destination.
- 1 basic SEO and analytics setup: Page title/meta, social preview, one analytics property connection and up to three agreed basic events.
- 1 handoff: Desktop/mobile checks and a written editing guide up to four pages.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One domain, one website/page, one form and one analytics property.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to eight sections, 1,500 words lightly edited from supplied copy and 12 supplied images.
- Formats
- Responsive HTML/CSS in existing approved architecture; optimized WebP/JPEG; PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery and one 45-minute design/handoff review.
- Client inputs
- Approved copy/assets, brand standards, domain/hosting access, form routing and consent/privacy text.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2–3 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve page outline
- Review custom page design
- Build and test form/analytics
- Complete mobile/desktop acceptance and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Multi-page website
- Custom ecommerce or member system
- Original photography
- Hosting/email subscriptions
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLanding Page (One Page Site)$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 custom landing page: One responsive WordPress or static page with up to eight sections and one primary conversion path.
- 1 contact form or conversion link: Up to six fields with one recipient route or one existing checkout/booking destination.
- 1 basic SEO and analytics setup: Page title/meta, social preview, one analytics property connection and up to three agreed basic events.
- 1 handoff: Desktop/mobile checks and a written editing guide up to four pages.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One domain, one website/page, one form and one analytics property.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to eight sections, 1,500 words lightly edited from supplied copy and 12 supplied images.
- Formats
- Responsive HTML/CSS in existing approved architecture; optimized WebP/JPEG; PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery and one 45-minute design/handoff review.
- Client inputs
- Approved copy/assets, brand standards, domain/hosting access, form routing and consent/privacy text.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2–3 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve page outline
- Review custom page design
- Build and test form/analytics
- Complete mobile/desktop acceptance and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Multi-page website
- Custom ecommerce or member system
- Original photography
- Hosting/email subscriptions
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Migration: Squarespace ↔ WordPressWeb Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingMigration: Squarespace ↔ WordPress$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 accepted migration inventory: Enumerate every page, content type, form, integration, domain and excluded system before acceptance; proposed starting envelope is 20 pages, 50 posts and 200 media files.
- 1 platform migration and theme rebuild: Move approved inventory between Squarespace and WordPress; rebuild approved design direction on the destination platform.
- 1 URL redirect map: Map every migrated URL in the accepted inventory and verify supported redirects.
- 1 validation and handoff report: Validate content samples, navigation, forms and desktop/mobile display against the signed inventory.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One source site and one destination site/domain; one platform change; DNS cutover only when separately approved in the accepted plan.
- Pages, words and records
- Complete accepted inventory; proposed starting envelope 20 pages, 50 posts, 200 assets and two simple forms; final exact count required before order acceptance.
- Formats
- Platform-native pages/posts; approved asset formats; CSV redirect map and migration validation report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery/inventory workshop, one 45-minute staging review and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Export and admin access, destination hosting, current URL list, approved design, licenses, backup access and rollback contact.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 3 business weeks for the accepted starting inventory after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory and back up source
- Approve migration/redirect plan
- Build destination and import content
- Validate staging
- Approve cutover and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Unlisted commerce/membership migrations
- Email-mailbox migration
- Search-ranking guarantee
- Unapproved DNS or payment changes
How the engagement begins: Checkout requests the migration and applies the $7,000 charge to an accepted project. Good Creative Media confirms scope and schedule before work begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate the work, the payment is refunded in full. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMigration: Squarespace ↔ WordPress$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 accepted migration inventory: Enumerate every page, content type, form, integration, domain and excluded system before acceptance; proposed starting envelope is 20 pages, 50 posts and 200 media files.
- 1 platform migration and theme rebuild: Move approved inventory between Squarespace and WordPress; rebuild approved design direction on the destination platform.
- 1 URL redirect map: Map every migrated URL in the accepted inventory and verify supported redirects.
- 1 validation and handoff report: Validate content samples, navigation, forms and desktop/mobile display against the signed inventory.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One source site and one destination site/domain; one platform change; DNS cutover only when separately approved in the accepted plan.
- Pages, words and records
- Complete accepted inventory; proposed starting envelope 20 pages, 50 posts, 200 assets and two simple forms; final exact count required before order acceptance.
- Formats
- Platform-native pages/posts; approved asset formats; CSV redirect map and migration validation report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery/inventory workshop, one 45-minute staging review and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Export and admin access, destination hosting, current URL list, approved design, licenses, backup access and rollback contact.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 3 business weeks for the accepted starting inventory after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory and back up source
- Approve migration/redirect plan
- Build destination and import content
- Validate staging
- Approve cutover and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Unlisted commerce/membership migrations
- Email-mailbox migration
- Search-ranking guarantee
- Unapproved DNS or payment changes
How the engagement begins: Checkout requests the migration and applies the $7,000 charge to an accepted project. Good Creative Media confirms scope and schedule before work begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate the work, the payment is refunded in full. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $8,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Artist Portfolio SiteWeb Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingArtist Portfolio Site$11,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 artist portfolio website: Up to six page types: Home/Portfolio, Statement, CV, About, Contact and optional store-link page.
- 50 artwork entries: Up to 50 works with supplied images, title, year, medium, dimensions and captions.
- 1 self-update structure: Reusable artwork template, one CV format and a 45-minute publishing walkthrough.
- 1 contact/store handoff: One contact form and optional link/handoff to an existing Etsy or Shopify store.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One artist identity, site/domain and existing external store link; no store build included.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to six page types; 50 artwork records; two supplied images per work; up to 3,000 supplied/lightly edited words.
- Formats
- Responsive website, optimized images, editable portfolio entries and PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery, one 45-minute design review and one 45-minute update training.
- Client inputs
- Selected artwork files, metadata/permissions, statement, CV, contact details and hosting/domain access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve portfolio taxonomy
- Design templates
- Enter up to 50 works
- Test mobile display/contact
- Train client and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Artwork photography
- Commerce catalog construction
- Ongoing portfolio entry
- Guaranteed five-minute editing time
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingArtist Portfolio Site$11,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 artist portfolio website: Up to six page types: Home/Portfolio, Statement, CV, About, Contact and optional store-link page.
- 50 artwork entries: Up to 50 works with supplied images, title, year, medium, dimensions and captions.
- 1 self-update structure: Reusable artwork template, one CV format and a 45-minute publishing walkthrough.
- 1 contact/store handoff: One contact form and optional link/handoff to an existing Etsy or Shopify store.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One artist identity, site/domain and existing external store link; no store build included.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to six page types; 50 artwork records; two supplied images per work; up to 3,000 supplied/lightly edited words.
- Formats
- Responsive website, optimized images, editable portfolio entries and PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery, one 45-minute design review and one 45-minute update training.
- Client inputs
- Selected artwork files, metadata/permissions, statement, CV, contact details and hosting/domain access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve portfolio taxonomy
- Design templates
- Enter up to 50 works
- Test mobile display/contact
- Train client and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Artwork photography
- Commerce catalog construction
- Ongoing portfolio entry
- Guaranteed five-minute editing time
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $11,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Migration: Shopify ↔ WooCommerceWeb Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingMigration: Shopify ↔ WooCommerce$11,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 store migration inventory: Specify all products/variants, customers and orders to be migrated, supported fields and retention limitations; proposed envelope 250 SKUs, 5,000 customers and 10,000 orders.
- 1 migration and theme rebuild: Move the complete accepted inventory between Shopify and WooCommerce with one approved destination theme design.
- 1 redirect and validation package: Redirect accepted changed URLs, reconcile record counts, sample orders/variants and test agreed checkout/shipping/tax configurations without live orders.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One source store, one destination store and one domain; payment tokens and passwords migrate only where providers support authorized transfer.
- Pages, words and records
- Entire accepted inventory; proposed starting capacity 250 SKUs, 5,000 customers and 10,000 orders; final counts and exceptions signed before acceptance.
- Formats
- Native destination store records; CSV reconciliation/redirect map; responsive theme.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute inventory meeting, one 60-minute staging review and one 45-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Authorized exports, source backups, destination account, tax/shipping rules, supported customer data and payment-provider coordination.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 3–4 business weeks for the accepted starting inventory after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm records/field support and backups
- Build destination theme
- Run test import and count reconciliation
- Validate checkout and redirects
- Approve cutover and rollback window
Separate costs and exclusions- Unsupported password/payment-token transfer
- Subscription entitlement recreation without separate plan
- Unlisted integrations
- SEO or data-completeness guarantee
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMigration: Shopify ↔ WooCommerce$11,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 store migration inventory: Specify all products/variants, customers and orders to be migrated, supported fields and retention limitations; proposed envelope 250 SKUs, 5,000 customers and 10,000 orders.
- 1 migration and theme rebuild: Move the complete accepted inventory between Shopify and WooCommerce with one approved destination theme design.
- 1 redirect and validation package: Redirect accepted changed URLs, reconcile record counts, sample orders/variants and test agreed checkout/shipping/tax configurations without live orders.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One source store, one destination store and one domain; payment tokens and passwords migrate only where providers support authorized transfer.
- Pages, words and records
- Entire accepted inventory; proposed starting capacity 250 SKUs, 5,000 customers and 10,000 orders; final counts and exceptions signed before acceptance.
- Formats
- Native destination store records; CSV reconciliation/redirect map; responsive theme.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute inventory meeting, one 60-minute staging review and one 45-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Authorized exports, source backups, destination account, tax/shipping rules, supported customer data and payment-provider coordination.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 3–4 business weeks for the accepted starting inventory after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm records/field support and backups
- Build destination theme
- Run test import and count reconciliation
- Validate checkout and redirects
- Approve cutover and rollback window
Separate costs and exclusions- Unsupported password/payment-token transfer
- Subscription entitlement recreation without separate plan
- Unlisted integrations
- SEO or data-completeness guarantee
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $11,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Small Business Site (up to 5 Pages)Web Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingSmall Business Site (up to 5 Pages)$13,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 5 responsive website pages: Up to five WordPress pages: Home, About, Services, Work and Contact using one custom visual system.
- 1 copy and SEO pass: Light copywriting/editing to brief up to 2,500 total words; titles/meta and basic on-page structure for every included page.
- 1 contact and measurement setup: One contact form up to eight fields with one email route, one analytics property connection and up to three basic events.
- 1 handoff: Mobile/desktop checks, editing guide and training.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One business, WordPress site/domain and hosting account; one form route.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to five pages, 2,500 words, 25 supplied images and six work examples.
- Formats
- Responsive WordPress pages; optimized images; PDF editing guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute kickoff, one 60-minute design review and one 60-minute training/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Brand files, page brief, factual service claims, supplied photography, approved privacy text and hosting/domain access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve sitemap/copy brief
- Review custom design
- Build five pages and integrations
- Verify mobile/desktop and form route
- Train and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional pages
- Custom business application
- Mailbox setup or migration
- Hosting and paid licenses
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSmall Business Site (up to 5 Pages)$13,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 5 responsive website pages: Up to five WordPress pages: Home, About, Services, Work and Contact using one custom visual system.
- 1 copy and SEO pass: Light copywriting/editing to brief up to 2,500 total words; titles/meta and basic on-page structure for every included page.
- 1 contact and measurement setup: One contact form up to eight fields with one email route, one analytics property connection and up to three basic events.
- 1 handoff: Mobile/desktop checks, editing guide and training.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One business, WordPress site/domain and hosting account; one form route.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to five pages, 2,500 words, 25 supplied images and six work examples.
- Formats
- Responsive WordPress pages; optimized images; PDF editing guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute kickoff, one 60-minute design review and one 60-minute training/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Brand files, page brief, factual service claims, supplied photography, approved privacy text and hosting/domain access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve sitemap/copy brief
- Review custom design
- Build five pages and integrations
- Verify mobile/desktop and form route
- Train and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional pages
- Custom business application
- Mailbox setup or migration
- Hosting and paid licenses
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $13,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Restaurant or Venue SiteWeb Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingRestaurant or Venue Site$16,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 6 restaurant or venue pages: Up to six pages covering the agreed home, menu/events, location/hours, gallery, private events and contact needs.
- 1 menu or events structure: One menu up to 60 items OR event listing structure with 12 initial events.
- 1 ordering or reservation integration: Configure one supported link/embed from an existing client-owned vendor.
- 1 gallery and local information setup: Up to 30 supplied images, accessibility/parking copy supplied by client, map/contact and basic search metadata.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One business/location, website/domain and reservation/ordering provider.
- Pages, words and records
- Six pages; either 60 menu items or 12 initial event records; 30 images; 3,000 supplied/lightly edited words.
- Formats
- Responsive website; menu text and optional supplied PDF; vendor-native link/embed.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery, one 60-minute review and one 45-minute update training.
- Client inputs
- Current prices/hours, menu or event data, licensed photos, accessibility facts and provider/hosting access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve location/content inventory
- Design menu/event navigation
- Build six pages and provider link
- Test mobile contact/booking paths
- Train client
Separate costs and exclusions- Building a custom reservation/POS system
- Food or venue photography
- Ticket fulfillment
- Vendor transaction fees
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingRestaurant or Venue Site$16,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 6 restaurant or venue pages: Up to six pages covering the agreed home, menu/events, location/hours, gallery, private events and contact needs.
- 1 menu or events structure: One menu up to 60 items OR event listing structure with 12 initial events.
- 1 ordering or reservation integration: Configure one supported link/embed from an existing client-owned vendor.
- 1 gallery and local information setup: Up to 30 supplied images, accessibility/parking copy supplied by client, map/contact and basic search metadata.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One business/location, website/domain and reservation/ordering provider.
- Pages, words and records
- Six pages; either 60 menu items or 12 initial event records; 30 images; 3,000 supplied/lightly edited words.
- Formats
- Responsive website; menu text and optional supplied PDF; vendor-native link/embed.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery, one 60-minute review and one 45-minute update training.
- Client inputs
- Current prices/hours, menu or event data, licensed photos, accessibility facts and provider/hosting access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve location/content inventory
- Design menu/event navigation
- Build six pages and provider link
- Test mobile contact/booking paths
- Train client
Separate costs and exclusions- Building a custom reservation/POS system
- Food or venue photography
- Ticket fulfillment
- Vendor transaction fees
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $16,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Online Store, Starter (up to 25 SKUs)Web Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingOnline Store, Starter (up to 25 SKUs)$16,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 starter online store: One WooCommerce or Shopify store using a customized approved theme with home, shop, product, cart/checkout, about and contact structures.
- 25 entered SKUs: Up to 25 distinct sellable SKUs/variants with supplied title, description, price, inventory and up to four images each.
- 1 commerce configuration: One payment provider, up to three shipping zones and five shipping rules; client-approved tax settings.
- 1 test and training package: Sandbox checkout checks, catalog guide and 60-minute handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One store/domain, currency, payment provider and inventory location.
- Pages, words and records
- 25 SKUs including variants, five catalog categories, up to four supplied images per SKU, six page/template structures.
- Formats
- Responsive store; platform-native products; optimized images; PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute inventory/kickoff, one 60-minute design review and one 60-minute merchant training.
- Client inputs
- Product table, licensed photos, SKU inventory, shipping/tax rules approved by client/adviser and merchant-owned provider access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve SKU inventory and rules
- Design store templates
- Enter 25 SKUs and configure commerce
- Test sandbox checkout and responsive display
- Merchant handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Original product photography
- Inventory/ERP integration
- Tax advice or registration
- Merchant, shipping and platform charges
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingOnline Store, Starter (up to 25 SKUs)$16,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 starter online store: One WooCommerce or Shopify store using a customized approved theme with home, shop, product, cart/checkout, about and contact structures.
- 25 entered SKUs: Up to 25 distinct sellable SKUs/variants with supplied title, description, price, inventory and up to four images each.
- 1 commerce configuration: One payment provider, up to three shipping zones and five shipping rules; client-approved tax settings.
- 1 test and training package: Sandbox checkout checks, catalog guide and 60-minute handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One store/domain, currency, payment provider and inventory location.
- Pages, words and records
- 25 SKUs including variants, five catalog categories, up to four supplied images per SKU, six page/template structures.
- Formats
- Responsive store; platform-native products; optimized images; PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute inventory/kickoff, one 60-minute design review and one 60-minute merchant training.
- Client inputs
- Product table, licensed photos, SKU inventory, shipping/tax rules approved by client/adviser and merchant-owned provider access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve SKU inventory and rules
- Design store templates
- Enter 25 SKUs and configure commerce
- Test sandbox checkout and responsive display
- Merchant handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Original product photography
- Inventory/ERP integration
- Tax advice or registration
- Merchant, shipping and platform charges
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $16,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Law Firm Website (Prepared for Attorney Review)Web Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingLaw Firm Website (Prepared for Attorney Review)$18,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 8 law-firm website pages: Up to eight pages, including up to four practice-area pages and up to two attorney biographies within the total.
- 1 attorney-review copy pass: Up to 5,000 words of light copy/editing with advertising claims, credentials and disclaimers flagged for attorney decision.
- 1 intake path: One form up to 12 fields with one approved routing destination, privacy/confidentiality language supplied or approved by the firm.
- 1 search, testing and handoff package: Metadata for included pages, basic analytics, mobile/desktop and form-route tests, editing guidance.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm, website/domain and intake destination; up to two attorneys and four practice areas.
- Pages, words and records
- Eight pages maximum; 5,000 words; 30 supplied images; 12 intake fields.
- Formats
- Responsive website; editable page copy and attorney-review checklist.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute discovery, one 60-minute design/content review with attorney approver and one 60-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Firm facts, bar/credential information, reviewed service descriptions, privacy/intake policy, authorized access and final attorney approval.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve sitemap and attorney review responsibilities
- Draft/design pages
- Obtain legal-content approval
- Build and test intake/search
- Handoff accepted site
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal advice or advertising-compliance certification
- Trust/IOLTA systems
- Custom case-management integration
- Client matter review
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLaw Firm Website (Prepared for Attorney Review)$18,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 8 law-firm website pages: Up to eight pages, including up to four practice-area pages and up to two attorney biographies within the total.
- 1 attorney-review copy pass: Up to 5,000 words of light copy/editing with advertising claims, credentials and disclaimers flagged for attorney decision.
- 1 intake path: One form up to 12 fields with one approved routing destination, privacy/confidentiality language supplied or approved by the firm.
- 1 search, testing and handoff package: Metadata for included pages, basic analytics, mobile/desktop and form-route tests, editing guidance.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm, website/domain and intake destination; up to two attorneys and four practice areas.
- Pages, words and records
- Eight pages maximum; 5,000 words; 30 supplied images; 12 intake fields.
- Formats
- Responsive website; editable page copy and attorney-review checklist.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute discovery, one 60-minute design/content review with attorney approver and one 60-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Firm facts, bar/credential information, reviewed service descriptions, privacy/intake policy, authorized access and final attorney approval.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve sitemap and attorney review responsibilities
- Draft/design pages
- Obtain legal-content approval
- Build and test intake/search
- Handoff accepted site
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal advice or advertising-compliance certification
- Trust/IOLTA systems
- Custom case-management integration
- Client matter review
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $18,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Standard Business Site (up to 10 Pages)Web Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingStandard Business Site (up to 10 Pages)$23,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 10 business website pages: Up to ten pages in one custom design system; service/practice pages, portfolio, journal and calendar as selected within the page plan.
- 1 light website copy package: Up to 5,000 words across included pages with SEO titles/meta and heading structure.
- 1 journal/calendar setup: One journal structure with five starter posts and one events structure with five starter event records using supplied content.
- 1 forms, search and handoff: Two forms up to eight fields each, one analytics connection, sitemap and mobile/desktop acceptance checks.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One business/site/domain, one journal and one calendar; two form routes.
- Pages, words and records
- Ten pages; 5,000 copy words; five initial blog records and five events; 50 supplied images.
- Formats
- Responsive website; reusable post/event templates; PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute discovery, two 60-minute design/content reviews and one 60-minute training.
- Client inputs
- Approved brief/assets, initial journal/event records, hosting/account access and form/privacy requirements.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve information architecture
- Review design and copy
- Build pages/journal/calendar
- Test integrations and responsive behavior
- Train and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Unlimited content entry
- Custom membership or commerce system
- Ongoing maintenance beyond accepted scope
- Hosting/license fees
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingStandard Business Site (up to 10 Pages)$23,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 10 business website pages: Up to ten pages in one custom design system; service/practice pages, portfolio, journal and calendar as selected within the page plan.
- 1 light website copy package: Up to 5,000 words across included pages with SEO titles/meta and heading structure.
- 1 journal/calendar setup: One journal structure with five starter posts and one events structure with five starter event records using supplied content.
- 1 forms, search and handoff: Two forms up to eight fields each, one analytics connection, sitemap and mobile/desktop acceptance checks.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One business/site/domain, one journal and one calendar; two form routes.
- Pages, words and records
- Ten pages; 5,000 copy words; five initial blog records and five events; 50 supplied images.
- Formats
- Responsive website; reusable post/event templates; PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute discovery, two 60-minute design/content reviews and one 60-minute training.
- Client inputs
- Approved brief/assets, initial journal/event records, hosting/account access and form/privacy requirements.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve information architecture
- Review design and copy
- Build pages/journal/calendar
- Test integrations and responsive behavior
- Train and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Unlimited content entry
- Custom membership or commerce system
- Ongoing maintenance beyond accepted scope
- Hosting/license fees
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $23,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Online Store, Standard (up to 250 SKUs)Web Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingOnline Store, Standard (up to 250 SKUs)$31,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 standard online store: One WooCommerce or Shopify store with custom theme treatment, category architecture, catalog search/filtering and related-product rules.
- 250 entered or imported SKUs: Up to 250 distinct sellable SKUs/variants from a client-prepared consistent import sheet; up to four supplied images each.
- 1 commerce and recovery setup: One payment provider, up to five shipping zones and 10 rules, client-approved tax settings and a three-email abandoned-cart sequence where platform/consent permits.
- 1 merchant handoff: Record-count reconciliation, sandbox checkout/filter tests and training.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One store/domain, currency and inventory location; one payment and one email platform.
- Pages, words and records
- 250 SKUs including variants; 20 categories; 10 filter attributes; eight page/template structures; three emails up to 250 words each.
- Formats
- Platform-native store and CSV import map; optimized product media; PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute catalog workshop, two 60-minute reviews and one 90-minute merchant training.
- Client inputs
- Complete catalog/variant data, photos, taxonomy, shipping/tax decisions, email consent rules and client-owned accounts.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve catalog schema and rules
- Design store/category system
- Import and reconcile 250 SKUs
- Configure cart sequence and test checkout
- Train merchant
Separate costs and exclusions- ERP/POS synchronization
- Product photography
- Custom fulfillment software
- Platform, transaction and email charges
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingOnline Store, Standard (up to 250 SKUs)$31,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 standard online store: One WooCommerce or Shopify store with custom theme treatment, category architecture, catalog search/filtering and related-product rules.
- 250 entered or imported SKUs: Up to 250 distinct sellable SKUs/variants from a client-prepared consistent import sheet; up to four supplied images each.
- 1 commerce and recovery setup: One payment provider, up to five shipping zones and 10 rules, client-approved tax settings and a three-email abandoned-cart sequence where platform/consent permits.
- 1 merchant handoff: Record-count reconciliation, sandbox checkout/filter tests and training.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One store/domain, currency and inventory location; one payment and one email platform.
- Pages, words and records
- 250 SKUs including variants; 20 categories; 10 filter attributes; eight page/template structures; three emails up to 250 words each.
- Formats
- Platform-native store and CSV import map; optimized product media; PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute catalog workshop, two 60-minute reviews and one 90-minute merchant training.
- Client inputs
- Complete catalog/variant data, photos, taxonomy, shipping/tax decisions, email consent rules and client-owned accounts.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve catalog schema and rules
- Design store/category system
- Import and reconcile 250 SKUs
- Configure cart sequence and test checkout
- Train merchant
Separate costs and exclusions- ERP/POS synchronization
- Product photography
- Custom fulfillment software
- Platform, transaction and email charges
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $31,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Headless / Custom Built Site — Accepted ScopeWeb Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingHeadless / Custom Built Site — Accepted Scope$31,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 custom architecture and accepted backlog: Discovery defines one application/site, user roles, data model and explicit acceptance criteria before implementation is accepted.
- 1 bounded custom site implementation: Proposed starting envelope: 12 responsive page templates, one CMS, three user roles, two external API integrations and eight backend endpoints.
- 1 quality and deployment package: Performance/accessibility baseline for agreed flows, dependency inventory, deployment configuration and handoff documentation.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One custom site, one production and one staging environment, one CMS and two named API integrations.
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed envelope: 12 templates, eight endpoints, three roles, up to 1,000 migrated content records; exact backlog required before acceptance.
- Formats
- Production source repository, deployment configuration, responsive site and technical handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- Two 90-minute discovery/architecture workshops, four 45-minute milestone reviews and one 90-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Business/user requirements, existing APIs and permissions, data schema, content inventory, hosting constraints and approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 12–16 business weeks for a fully accepted bounded backlog; larger scope receives its own calendar after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Discover and approve fixed backlog
- Approve architecture and data flows
- Implement milestone slices
- Verify acceptance/performance/accessibility baseline
- Deploy approved release and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Unspecified backend features
- Unlimited integrations or migration
- Ongoing operational service-level agreement
- Hosting/API/license fees
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingHeadless / Custom Built Site — Accepted Scope$31,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 custom architecture and accepted backlog: Discovery defines one application/site, user roles, data model and explicit acceptance criteria before implementation is accepted.
- 1 bounded custom site implementation: Proposed starting envelope: 12 responsive page templates, one CMS, three user roles, two external API integrations and eight backend endpoints.
- 1 quality and deployment package: Performance/accessibility baseline for agreed flows, dependency inventory, deployment configuration and handoff documentation.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One custom site, one production and one staging environment, one CMS and two named API integrations.
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed envelope: 12 templates, eight endpoints, three roles, up to 1,000 migrated content records; exact backlog required before acceptance.
- Formats
- Production source repository, deployment configuration, responsive site and technical handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- Two 90-minute discovery/architecture workshops, four 45-minute milestone reviews and one 90-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Business/user requirements, existing APIs and permissions, data schema, content inventory, hosting constraints and approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 12–16 business weeks for a fully accepted bounded backlog; larger scope receives its own calendar after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Discover and approve fixed backlog
- Approve architecture and data flows
- Implement milestone slices
- Verify acceptance/performance/accessibility baseline
- Deploy approved release and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Unspecified backend features
- Unlimited integrations or migration
- Ongoing operational service-level agreement
- Hosting/API/license fees
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $31,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Premium Custom Site — 10–15 Pages by Accepted ScopeWeb Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingPremium Custom Site — 10–15 Pages by Accepted Scope$36,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 15 custom website pages: Proposed new-order envelope is 10–15 individually planned pages with one bespoke design system; every accepted page is listed.
- 1 journal, forms and integrations: One journal with 10 initial supplied posts, three forms up to 12 fields each and two named supported integrations.
- 1 light copy package: Up to 7,500 words across accepted pages with metadata and editorial consistency.
- 90 calendar days of post-launch maintenance: First 90 calendar days include weekly backup/update checks and two small supplied-content requests per service month, across two existing pages, 500 supplied words and four image replacements total per month. Existing contracted support entitlements remain unchanged.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One site/domain, one journal, two integrations, production and staging; 10–15 accepted pages.
- Pages, words and records
- 15-page proposed cap, 7,500 words, 10 journal records, 75 supplied images; 90 days maintenance retained.
- Formats
- Responsive site/design tokens; native content templates; source/handoff documentation.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute discovery, three 60-minute milestone reviews and one 90-minute training/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Approved sitemap, brand/assets, copy facts, initial posts, integration permissions and named approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 8–12 business weeks to launch, followed by the included 90 calendar days of maintenance after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve exact page inventory
- Approve bespoke design system
- Build copy/pages/integrations
- Validate agreed flows
- Launch and perform 90-day maintenance
Separate costs and exclusions- Pages beyond accepted inventory
- Custom business application backend
- Ongoing maintenance after included period
- Hosting/third-party fees
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPremium Custom Site — 10–15 Pages by Accepted Scope$36,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 15 custom website pages: Proposed new-order envelope is 10–15 individually planned pages with one bespoke design system; every accepted page is listed.
- 1 journal, forms and integrations: One journal with 10 initial supplied posts, three forms up to 12 fields each and two named supported integrations.
- 1 light copy package: Up to 7,500 words across accepted pages with metadata and editorial consistency.
- 90 calendar days of post-launch maintenance: First 90 calendar days include weekly backup/update checks and two small supplied-content requests per service month, across two existing pages, 500 supplied words and four image replacements total per month. Existing contracted support entitlements remain unchanged.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One site/domain, one journal, two integrations, production and staging; 10–15 accepted pages.
- Pages, words and records
- 15-page proposed cap, 7,500 words, 10 journal records, 75 supplied images; 90 days maintenance retained.
- Formats
- Responsive site/design tokens; native content templates; source/handoff documentation.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute discovery, three 60-minute milestone reviews and one 90-minute training/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Approved sitemap, brand/assets, copy facts, initial posts, integration permissions and named approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 8–12 business weeks to launch, followed by the included 90 calendar days of maintenance after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve exact page inventory
- Approve bespoke design system
- Build copy/pages/integrations
- Validate agreed flows
- Launch and perform 90-day maintenance
Separate costs and exclusions- Pages beyond accepted inventory
- Custom business application backend
- Ongoing maintenance after included period
- Hosting/third-party fees
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $36,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Online Store, Large Catalog — 250–500 SKUs by Accepted ScopeWeb Design & DevelopmentIncluded scope and billingOnline Store, Large Catalog — 250–500 SKUs by Accepted Scope$46,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 large-catalog store architecture: One WooCommerce or Shopify store with catalog taxonomy, faceted search and merchandising rules.
- 500 imported SKUs in proposed starting envelope: Accepted new-order inventory starts at 250 and is bounded at 500 sellable SKUs/variants; every supplied valid record in that inventory is imported and reconciled.
- 1 merchandising and commerce configuration: Up to 40 categories, 15 filter attributes, 10 collection/promotion rules, one payment provider and up to 10 shipping zones with client-approved tax settings.
- 1 catalog-operations handoff: Bulk import template, staff workflow, count reconciliation, checkout/search tests and two training sessions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One store/domain, one currency, up to two inventory locations and one payment provider.
- Pages, words and records
- 250–500 accepted SKUs/variants; 40 categories; 15 facets; 10 merchandising rules; up to five supplied images per SKU.
- Formats
- Native store catalog, CSV import and error ledger, responsive templates and operator guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- Two 90-minute catalog workshops, two 60-minute milestone reviews and two 60-minute staff trainings.
- Client inputs
- Clean complete SKU/variant sheet, image rights, taxonomy, inventory/shipping/tax rules and client-owned platform accounts.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 10–12 business weeks for the accepted starting catalog after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve exact catalog and data mapping
- Design taxonomy/templates
- Test import and reconcile counts
- Configure facets/merchandising/checkout
- Train operators and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Unbounded catalog entry
- ERP/warehouse integration
- Product photography
- Platform/transaction/license fees
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingOnline Store, Large Catalog — 250–500 SKUs by Accepted Scope$46,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 large-catalog store architecture: One WooCommerce or Shopify store with catalog taxonomy, faceted search and merchandising rules.
- 500 imported SKUs in proposed starting envelope: Accepted new-order inventory starts at 250 and is bounded at 500 sellable SKUs/variants; every supplied valid record in that inventory is imported and reconciled.
- 1 merchandising and commerce configuration: Up to 40 categories, 15 filter attributes, 10 collection/promotion rules, one payment provider and up to 10 shipping zones with client-approved tax settings.
- 1 catalog-operations handoff: Bulk import template, staff workflow, count reconciliation, checkout/search tests and two training sessions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One store/domain, one currency, up to two inventory locations and one payment provider.
- Pages, words and records
- 250–500 accepted SKUs/variants; 40 categories; 15 facets; 10 merchandising rules; up to five supplied images per SKU.
- Formats
- Native store catalog, CSV import and error ledger, responsive templates and operator guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- Two 90-minute catalog workshops, two 60-minute milestone reviews and two 60-minute staff trainings.
- Client inputs
- Clean complete SKU/variant sheet, image rights, taxonomy, inventory/shipping/tax rules and client-owned platform accounts.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 10–12 business weeks for the accepted starting catalog after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve exact catalog and data mapping
- Design taxonomy/templates
- Test import and reconcile counts
- Configure facets/merchandising/checkout
- Train operators and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Unbounded catalog entry
- ERP/warehouse integration
- Product photography
- Platform/transaction/license fees
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $46,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Google Analytics + Search Console SetupDigital MarketingIncluded scope and billingGoogle Analytics + Search Console Setup$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 GA4 and Search Console setup: Configure or connect one GA4 property and one Search Console property for one website using one tag installation method.
- 3 agreed conversion events: Up to three basic form/click/contact conversions with test evidence and consent-setting observations.
- 1 handoff and privacy-language recommendations: Up to three pages describing configured measures, limitations and proposed privacy-language changes for client approval.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One website/domain, GA4 property, Search Console property and tag deployment method.
- Pages, words and records
- Three conversion definitions; five test paths; one three-page guide.
- Formats
- Platform-native configuration, test log and PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute measurement kickoff and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Authorized website/analytics access, business conversion definitions and approved consent/privacy policy.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 1 business week after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve conversion definitions
- Install/connect properties and tags
- Test events and record limitations
- Handoff documentation
Separate costs and exclusions- Server-side tagging
- Ecommerce item-level instrumentation
- Historical data recovery
- Legal privacy opinion
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingGoogle Analytics + Search Console Setup$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 GA4 and Search Console setup: Configure or connect one GA4 property and one Search Console property for one website using one tag installation method.
- 3 agreed conversion events: Up to three basic form/click/contact conversions with test evidence and consent-setting observations.
- 1 handoff and privacy-language recommendations: Up to three pages describing configured measures, limitations and proposed privacy-language changes for client approval.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One website/domain, GA4 property, Search Console property and tag deployment method.
- Pages, words and records
- Three conversion definitions; five test paths; one three-page guide.
- Formats
- Platform-native configuration, test log and PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute measurement kickoff and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Authorized website/analytics access, business conversion definitions and approved consent/privacy policy.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 1 business week after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve conversion definitions
- Install/connect properties and tags
- Test events and record limitations
- Handoff documentation
Separate costs and exclusions- Server-side tagging
- Ecommerce item-level instrumentation
- Historical data recovery
- Legal privacy opinion
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Google Business Profile SetupDigital MarketingIncluded scope and billingGoogle Business Profile Setup$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 eligible location profile: Ownership/verification assistance, available category/services/contact/hours fields, description and website link with agreed tracking.
- 15 supplied photo uploads: Up to 15 licensed client images cropped for the supported profile fields.
- 1 factual profile Q&A preparation: Up to five client-approved factual answers; use only available permitted business fields or responses to genuine questions.
- 1 access handoff: Status log with pending verification tasks and ownership/access records.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One eligible business/location and one Google Business Profile under client ownership.
- Pages, words and records
- One profile description, five factual answers, 15 supplied photos and up to 20 services.
- Formats
- Platform-supported image sizes and fields; access/status document.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute eligibility/intake meeting and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Proof of legitimate business/location, current hours/services, website, licensed photos and client participation in verification.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks for preparation and submission, excluding Google verification/review time after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm eligibility and ownership route
- Prepare factual profile and photos
- Assist verification and populate supported fields
- Record status and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Fabricated public questions or reviews
- Suspension/reinstatement appeals
- Local ranking guarantee
- Original photography
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingGoogle Business Profile Setup$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 eligible location profile: Ownership/verification assistance, available category/services/contact/hours fields, description and website link with agreed tracking.
- 15 supplied photo uploads: Up to 15 licensed client images cropped for the supported profile fields.
- 1 factual profile Q&A preparation: Up to five client-approved factual answers; use only available permitted business fields or responses to genuine questions.
- 1 access handoff: Status log with pending verification tasks and ownership/access records.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One eligible business/location and one Google Business Profile under client ownership.
- Pages, words and records
- One profile description, five factual answers, 15 supplied photos and up to 20 services.
- Formats
- Platform-supported image sizes and fields; access/status document.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute eligibility/intake meeting and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Proof of legitimate business/location, current hours/services, website, licensed photos and client participation in verification.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks for preparation and submission, excluding Google verification/review time after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm eligibility and ownership route
- Prepare factual profile and photos
- Assist verification and populate supported fields
- Record status and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Fabricated public questions or reviews
- Suspension/reinstatement appeals
- Local ranking guarantee
- Original photography
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Monthly NewsletterDigital MarketingIncluded scope and billingMonthly Newsletter$2,000 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 newsletter each month: 300–600 words, one subject/preheader pair, one approved template and up to four supplied images.
- 1 approved audience send: One scheduled send to one approved segment/list of up to 5,000 opted-in recipients using the client’s existing email platform.
- 1 monthly send report: Delivery/open/click observations with platform limitations and tracked CTA links where supported.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization, email platform, sender identity and approved recipient segment.
- Pages, words and records
- One issue/month, 300–600 words, four images and up to 5,000 recipient records.
- Formats
- HTML or plain-text email, platform preview and PDF/CSV report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute monthly planning check-in or equivalent written brief.
- Client inputs
- Approved news/offers, licensed images, permissioned list, sender/domain configuration and sign-off before send.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly cycle; draft target 7 business days before the agreed send date after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated copy/design revision plus final factual or production correction before the approved send. Additional issue concepts or post-approval changes require written scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm issue brief
- Draft copy/design and tracked links
- Obtain final approval and test
- Schedule one send
- Report observed results
Separate costs and exclusions- Initial email-platform migration/setup
- Additional issues or resend campaigns
- Purchased-list acquisition
- Email platform fees
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMonthly Newsletter$2,000 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 newsletter each month: 300–600 words, one subject/preheader pair, one approved template and up to four supplied images.
- 1 approved audience send: One scheduled send to one approved segment/list of up to 5,000 opted-in recipients using the client’s existing email platform.
- 1 monthly send report: Delivery/open/click observations with platform limitations and tracked CTA links where supported.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization, email platform, sender identity and approved recipient segment.
- Pages, words and records
- One issue/month, 300–600 words, four images and up to 5,000 recipient records.
- Formats
- HTML or plain-text email, platform preview and PDF/CSV report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute monthly planning check-in or equivalent written brief.
- Client inputs
- Approved news/offers, licensed images, permissioned list, sender/domain configuration and sign-off before send.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly cycle; draft target 7 business days before the agreed send date after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated copy/design revision plus final factual or production correction before the approved send. Additional issue concepts or post-approval changes require written scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm issue brief
- Draft copy/design and tracked links
- Obtain final approval and test
- Schedule one send
- Report observed results
Separate costs and exclusions- Initial email-platform migration/setup
- Additional issues or resend campaigns
- Purchased-list acquisition
- Email platform fees
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,000 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Local SEO OngoingDigital MarketingIncluded scope and billingLocal SEO Ongoing$2,500 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 1 monthly local content update: Up to 500 words on an existing page or post for one business/location.
- 5 citation corrections per month: Up to five existing eligible directory records corrected, with attempts and pending provider action logged.
- 10 review-response drafts per month: Up to 10 routine replies drafted for client approval; sensitive issues escalated.
- 1 profile check and monthly report: One Business Profile check, one-page report and 30-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One business location, domain and Business Profile; five citation records/month.
- Pages, words and records
- 500-word update; 10 response drafts; one-page report monthly.
- Formats
- Existing website/profile fields; written drafts/report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Profile/site access, current business facts, approved response guidelines and timely approval of content.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly production and reporting cycles after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm monthly priorities
- Update content and citation records
- Draft review responses and inspect profile
- Deliver one-page report
Separate costs and exclusions- New website build
- Unlimited reputation/crisis handling
- Paid backlinks/review acquisition
- Ranking or lead guarantee
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLocal SEO Ongoing$2,500 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 1 monthly local content update: Up to 500 words on an existing page or post for one business/location.
- 5 citation corrections per month: Up to five existing eligible directory records corrected, with attempts and pending provider action logged.
- 10 review-response drafts per month: Up to 10 routine replies drafted for client approval; sensitive issues escalated.
- 1 profile check and monthly report: One Business Profile check, one-page report and 30-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One business location, domain and Business Profile; five citation records/month.
- Pages, words and records
- 500-word update; 10 response drafts; one-page report monthly.
- Formats
- Existing website/profile fields; written drafts/report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Profile/site access, current business facts, approved response guidelines and timely approval of content.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly production and reporting cycles after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm monthly priorities
- Update content and citation records
- Draft review responses and inspect profile
- Deliver one-page report
Separate costs and exclusions- New website build
- Unlimited reputation/crisis handling
- Paid backlinks/review acquisition
- Ranking or lead guarantee
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,500 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Conversion Tracking + DashboardDigital MarketingIncluded scope and billingConversion Tracking + Dashboard$2,400 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 single-page dashboard: One Looker Studio or equivalent reporting dashboard with three principal monthly KPIs and up to six supporting metrics.
- 3 native data-source connections: Up to three client-authorized sources using supported native connectors.
- 3 conversion definitions and validation tests: Up to three measures mapped to existing supported data; test observations and attribution limitations documented.
- 1 operating guide: Up to five pages covering refresh behavior, owner access and metric definitions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One dashboard/workspace and up to three native source accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- Three principal KPIs, six supporting measures, three conversions and up to 12 months of existing available data.
- Formats
- Native dashboard plus PDF/export view and written guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute KPI workshop and one 45-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Read-only source access, approved KPI definitions and consent/privacy constraints.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve three principal KPIs
- Connect supported data
- Build one-page view
- Validate calculations and limitations
- Handoff guide
Separate costs and exclusions- Custom ETL/data warehouse
- Historical data reconstruction
- Ongoing monthly interpretation
- Paid connector fees
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingConversion Tracking + Dashboard$2,400 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 single-page dashboard: One Looker Studio or equivalent reporting dashboard with three principal monthly KPIs and up to six supporting metrics.
- 3 native data-source connections: Up to three client-authorized sources using supported native connectors.
- 3 conversion definitions and validation tests: Up to three measures mapped to existing supported data; test observations and attribution limitations documented.
- 1 operating guide: Up to five pages covering refresh behavior, owner access and metric definitions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One dashboard/workspace and up to three native source accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- Three principal KPIs, six supporting measures, three conversions and up to 12 months of existing available data.
- Formats
- Native dashboard plus PDF/export view and written guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute KPI workshop and one 45-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Read-only source access, approved KPI definitions and consent/privacy constraints.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve three principal KPIs
- Connect supported data
- Build one-page view
- Validate calculations and limitations
- Handoff guide
Separate costs and exclusions- Custom ETL/data warehouse
- Historical data reconstruction
- Ongoing monthly interpretation
- Paid connector fees
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,400 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Email Marketing SetupDigital MarketingIncluded scope and billingEmail Marketing Setup$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 email account and audience structure: Configure one existing/new client-owned email platform with up to three segments and import one consented list up to 5,000 records.
- 3 welcome emails: Three emails up to 400 words each, with subject/preheader and CTA.
- 1 branded reusable template: One responsive email template using supplied identity and up to four image positions.
- 2 signup forms: Two platform-native forms with approved consent language, installed using supported embeds/links.
- 1 test and handoff: Preview/test sequence, permissions and sender-configuration checklist with operator guide.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One email platform, sender domain, audience list and existing website.
- Pages, words and records
- 5,000 import records; three segments; three 400-word welcome emails; two forms.
- Formats
- Platform-native automation/template/forms; editable copy and PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery, one 45-minute copy/template review and one 45-minute training.
- Client inputs
- Consent-proven audience file, brand/copy facts, client-owned platform/domain access and approved privacy language.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve list/consent inventory
- Configure platform and template
- Build three-email sequence and forms
- Test triggers and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Mailbox or domain-email migration
- Purchased lists
- Extensive data cleaning
- Guaranteed inbox placement
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingEmail Marketing Setup$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 email account and audience structure: Configure one existing/new client-owned email platform with up to three segments and import one consented list up to 5,000 records.
- 3 welcome emails: Three emails up to 400 words each, with subject/preheader and CTA.
- 1 branded reusable template: One responsive email template using supplied identity and up to four image positions.
- 2 signup forms: Two platform-native forms with approved consent language, installed using supported embeds/links.
- 1 test and handoff: Preview/test sequence, permissions and sender-configuration checklist with operator guide.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One email platform, sender domain, audience list and existing website.
- Pages, words and records
- 5,000 import records; three segments; three 400-word welcome emails; two forms.
- Formats
- Platform-native automation/template/forms; editable copy and PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery, one 45-minute copy/template review and one 45-minute training.
- Client inputs
- Consent-proven audience file, brand/copy facts, client-owned platform/domain access and approved privacy language.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve list/consent inventory
- Configure platform and template
- Build three-email sequence and forms
- Test triggers and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Mailbox or domain-email migration
- Purchased lists
- Extensive data cleaning
- Guaranteed inbox placement
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Paid Search ManagementDigital MarketingIncluded scope and billingPaid Search Management$3,200 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 managed search-ad account per month: One Google OR Microsoft Ads account with up to three campaigns and 10 ad groups.
- 1 optimization pass each week: Review bids/budget, queries, negatives and available conversion signals in a scheduled weekly pass.
- 4 new ad-copy variations per month: Up to four variations within accepted campaigns plus one landing-page test plan; one small text/CTA test on an existing accessible page.
- 1 monthly report and review: One-page observed-results report and 30-minute review with spend/limitations.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One search network/account, three campaigns, 10 ad groups and one existing landing page.
- Pages, words and records
- Four copy variations and one bounded landing-page test/month; existing current ad-spend fee terms retained separately.
- Formats
- Native search ads and report; page text/CTA variant; no new page build.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Authorized ad/analytics access, approved budget, conversion definitions, offers and landing-page access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly cycles with one scheduled optimization pass per business week after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve monthly budget and tests
- Perform weekly account optimization
- Review agreed variations/test
- Deliver monthly report
Separate costs and exclusions- Media spend included in service fee
- New landing-page construction
- Additional ad networks
- Performance guarantee
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPaid Search Management$3,200 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 managed search-ad account per month: One Google OR Microsoft Ads account with up to three campaigns and 10 ad groups.
- 1 optimization pass each week: Review bids/budget, queries, negatives and available conversion signals in a scheduled weekly pass.
- 4 new ad-copy variations per month: Up to four variations within accepted campaigns plus one landing-page test plan; one small text/CTA test on an existing accessible page.
- 1 monthly report and review: One-page observed-results report and 30-minute review with spend/limitations.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One search network/account, three campaigns, 10 ad groups and one existing landing page.
- Pages, words and records
- Four copy variations and one bounded landing-page test/month; existing current ad-spend fee terms retained separately.
- Formats
- Native search ads and report; page text/CTA variant; no new page build.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Authorized ad/analytics access, approved budget, conversion definitions, offers and landing-page access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly cycles with one scheduled optimization pass per business week after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve monthly budget and tests
- Perform weekly account optimization
- Review agreed variations/test
- Deliver monthly report
Separate costs and exclusions- Media spend included in service fee
- New landing-page construction
- Additional ad networks
- Performance guarantee
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,200 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
SEO AuditDigital MarketingIncluded scope and billingSEO Audit$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 SEO audit: One domain with up to 50 public URLs; technical health, content/keyword structure, backlinks/reputation and local visibility reviewed.
- 1 evidence register: Observed issues with URL/date/source and limitations; one Business Profile and two competitors included.
- 1 three-priority action plan: Written report up to 15 pages identifying three highest-priority improvements and dependencies.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One domain, Business Profile, available GA4/Search Console and two selected competitors.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to 50 crawled public URLs; 90 days of available performance data; 15-page report.
- Formats
- PDF audit and editable issue register.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute kickoff and one 45-minute findings meeting.
- Client inputs
- Website/analytics access, current objectives, locations and existing search history.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm URL/access inventory
- Review technical/content/reputation evidence
- Rank three priorities
- Present findings
Separate costs and exclusions- Implementing repairs
- New content production
- Paid link acquisition
- Rankings or traffic guarantee
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSEO Audit$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 SEO audit: One domain with up to 50 public URLs; technical health, content/keyword structure, backlinks/reputation and local visibility reviewed.
- 1 evidence register: Observed issues with URL/date/source and limitations; one Business Profile and two competitors included.
- 1 three-priority action plan: Written report up to 15 pages identifying three highest-priority improvements and dependencies.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One domain, Business Profile, available GA4/Search Console and two selected competitors.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to 50 crawled public URLs; 90 days of available performance data; 15-page report.
- Formats
- PDF audit and editable issue register.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute kickoff and one 45-minute findings meeting.
- Client inputs
- Website/analytics access, current objectives, locations and existing search history.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm URL/access inventory
- Review technical/content/reputation evidence
- Rank three priorities
- Present findings
Separate costs and exclusions- Implementing repairs
- New content production
- Paid link acquisition
- Rankings or traffic guarantee
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Paid Search Campaign SetupDigital MarketingIncluded scope and billingPaid Search Campaign Setup$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 search campaign setup: One Google OR Microsoft Ads account, one campaign and three ad groups.
- 6 responsive search-ad drafts: Two ads per group with platform-supported asset counts; up to 15 headlines and four descriptions per ad where supported.
- 1 keyword/audience plan: Up to 60 initial keywords, 30 negatives and approved location/schedule targeting.
- 1 landing-page review and tracking: Review one existing landing page, recommend changes and configure up to three supported conversions; client approves spend and activation.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One ad network/account, campaign, landing page and conversion destination.
- Pages, words and records
- Three ad groups; six ad drafts; 60 keywords; 30 negatives; three conversions.
- Formats
- Native ad-platform structures, editable copy and setup/test log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery and one 45-minute campaign approval/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Offer/audience details, budgets, ad/analytics access, landing page and approved claims.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve audience/keyword brief
- Build three groups and six ad drafts
- Configure supported tracking
- Obtain campaign/spend approval
- Validate and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Ongoing management
- New landing-page build
- Additional ad networks
- Lead/sales guarantee
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPaid Search Campaign Setup$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 search campaign setup: One Google OR Microsoft Ads account, one campaign and three ad groups.
- 6 responsive search-ad drafts: Two ads per group with platform-supported asset counts; up to 15 headlines and four descriptions per ad where supported.
- 1 keyword/audience plan: Up to 60 initial keywords, 30 negatives and approved location/schedule targeting.
- 1 landing-page review and tracking: Review one existing landing page, recommend changes and configure up to three supported conversions; client approves spend and activation.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One ad network/account, campaign, landing page and conversion destination.
- Pages, words and records
- Three ad groups; six ad drafts; 60 keywords; 30 negatives; three conversions.
- Formats
- Native ad-platform structures, editable copy and setup/test log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery and one 45-minute campaign approval/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Offer/audience details, budgets, ad/analytics access, landing page and approved claims.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve audience/keyword brief
- Build three groups and six ad drafts
- Configure supported tracking
- Obtain campaign/spend approval
- Validate and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Ongoing management
- New landing-page build
- Additional ad networks
- Lead/sales guarantee
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
SEO Setup (Existing Site)Digital MarketingIncluded scope and billingSEO Setup (Existing Site)$7,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 complete accepted page inventory: Identify every existing page and image asset before acceptance; proposed planning envelope is 50 pages and 200 images, with a written quote if inventory is larger.
- 1 on-page SEO implementation: Titles/meta on all accepted pages, image-alt review on all accepted images, internal-link corrections and one agreed schema implementation.
- 1 sitemap/robots configuration: Generate/verify sitemap and review robots directives for the accepted site.
- 10 local citation corrections: Up to 10 existing eligible directory entries; submissions and pending provider responses documented.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One existing site/domain and one business/location; every page in the accepted inventory included.
- Pages, words and records
- Accepted exact counts required; proposed envelope 50 pages, 200 images and 10 citation entries.
- Formats
- Native site edits, schema markup, sitemap and implementation/validation log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute audit-to-action workshop and one 45-minute completion review.
- Client inputs
- Approved audit findings, complete page/asset inventory, website/profile access and factual business information.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 3 business weeks for the accepted inventory after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve all-page inventory
- Implement metadata/alt/schema/link changes
- Update sitemap/robots and citations
- Validate changes and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Website rebuild
- New long-form pages
- Link acquisition
- Ongoing SEO retainer
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSEO Setup (Existing Site)$7,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 complete accepted page inventory: Identify every existing page and image asset before acceptance; proposed planning envelope is 50 pages and 200 images, with a written quote if inventory is larger.
- 1 on-page SEO implementation: Titles/meta on all accepted pages, image-alt review on all accepted images, internal-link corrections and one agreed schema implementation.
- 1 sitemap/robots configuration: Generate/verify sitemap and review robots directives for the accepted site.
- 10 local citation corrections: Up to 10 existing eligible directory entries; submissions and pending provider responses documented.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One existing site/domain and one business/location; every page in the accepted inventory included.
- Pages, words and records
- Accepted exact counts required; proposed envelope 50 pages, 200 images and 10 citation entries.
- Formats
- Native site edits, schema markup, sitemap and implementation/validation log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute audit-to-action workshop and one 45-minute completion review.
- Client inputs
- Approved audit findings, complete page/asset inventory, website/profile access and factual business information.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 3 business weeks for the accepted inventory after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve all-page inventory
- Implement metadata/alt/schema/link changes
- Update sitemap/robots and citations
- Validate changes and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Website rebuild
- New long-form pages
- Link acquisition
- Ongoing SEO retainer
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $7,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Single Platform SetupSocial MediaIncluded scope and billingSingle Platform Setup$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 completed social profile: Configure one available account/profile: handle, display name, bio up to 150 words, supported category/contact fields and one destination link.
- 2 profile/cover assets: One supplied-photo profile treatment and one cover/banner design adapted to current platform field sizes.
- 1 ownership and access handoff: Record profile/sign-in URLs, client owner and delegated access method; client account spreadsheet updated when an account is actually configured.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One named platform/profile owned by the client.
- Pages, words and records
- One 150-word bio; one link; one profile treatment and one cover.
- Formats
- Platform-supported JPEG/PNG images; editable bio and access/status log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Approved name/bio facts, licensed logo/photo, contact/link information and client participation in verification/access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 1 business week, excluding platform verification/review time after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm ownership and available fields
- Prepare profile copy/assets
- Apply approved profile details
- Record access and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Original photoshoot or new identity
- Ongoing posting/community work
- Account recovery/appeals
- Paid verification subscriptions
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSingle Platform Setup$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 completed social profile: Configure one available account/profile: handle, display name, bio up to 150 words, supported category/contact fields and one destination link.
- 2 profile/cover assets: One supplied-photo profile treatment and one cover/banner design adapted to current platform field sizes.
- 1 ownership and access handoff: Record profile/sign-in URLs, client owner and delegated access method; client account spreadsheet updated when an account is actually configured.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One named platform/profile owned by the client.
- Pages, words and records
- One 150-word bio; one link; one profile treatment and one cover.
- Formats
- Platform-supported JPEG/PNG images; editable bio and access/status log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Approved name/bio facts, licensed logo/photo, contact/link information and client participation in verification/access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 1 business week, excluding platform verification/review time after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm ownership and available fields
- Prepare profile copy/assets
- Apply approved profile details
- Record access and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Original photoshoot or new identity
- Ongoing posting/community work
- Account recovery/appeals
- Paid verification subscriptions
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Community Management OnlySocial MediaIncluded scope and billingCommunity Management Only$2,000 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 2 managed community profiles: Up to two named profiles, monitored once each business day Monday–Friday in one agreed window.
- 150 routine handled interactions per month: Up to 150 incoming threads; replies/DMs/moderation use the approved response matrix.
- 1 escalation and monthly activity report: Sensitive matters routed to the client; monthly counts, themes, escalations and unresolved threads summarized.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Up to two profiles/accounts, one designated weekday monitoring window; no weekend coverage.
- Pages, words and records
- 150 routine interaction threads; one monthly report.
- Formats
- Native replies/DMs/moderation tools; response matrix and activity log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute response/escalation workshop and one 30-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Delegated account access, approved response matrix, escalation contacts, prohibited topics and customer-service decision owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly service cycle with monitoring in one agreed Monday–Friday business-day window after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve response/escalation matrix
- Monitor and handle within monthly cap
- Escalate sensitive matters
- Report activity and cap use
Separate costs and exclusions- 24-hour, emergency or weekend coverage
- Resolving refunds/contracts or legal/medical matters
- New content production
- Crisis PR
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingCommunity Management Only$2,000 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 2 managed community profiles: Up to two named profiles, monitored once each business day Monday–Friday in one agreed window.
- 150 routine handled interactions per month: Up to 150 incoming threads; replies/DMs/moderation use the approved response matrix.
- 1 escalation and monthly activity report: Sensitive matters routed to the client; monthly counts, themes, escalations and unresolved threads summarized.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Up to two profiles/accounts, one designated weekday monitoring window; no weekend coverage.
- Pages, words and records
- 150 routine interaction threads; one monthly report.
- Formats
- Native replies/DMs/moderation tools; response matrix and activity log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute response/escalation workshop and one 30-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Delegated account access, approved response matrix, escalation contacts, prohibited topics and customer-service decision owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly service cycle with monitoring in one agreed Monday–Friday business-day window after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve response/escalation matrix
- Monitor and handle within monthly cap
- Escalate sensitive matters
- Report activity and cap use
Separate costs and exclusions- 24-hour, emergency or weekend coverage
- Resolving refunds/contracts or legal/medical matters
- New content production
- Crisis PR
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,000 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
LinkedIn GhostwritingSocial MediaIncluded scope and billingLinkedIn Ghostwriting$2,200 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 4 original long-form LinkedIn posts per month: Four distinct posts in the client’s voice, up to 500 words each, with hook, CTA and source/fact checks from supplied materials.
- 1 voice interview per month: One 30-minute interview and review of up to five supplied writing samples.
- 4 LinkedIn publishing placements: Four approved posts to one profile on the agreed schedule; editable copy handoff if publishing access is unavailable.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One LinkedIn profile and one named voice/author; four placements/month.
- Pages, words and records
- Four original posts, up to 500 words each; five voice samples; no automatic duplicate article/newsletter versions.
- Formats
- Editable text/native LinkedIn post, tracked CTA link where supported; supplied image alt text if applicable.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute monthly voice interview; written approval of all four posts.
- Client inputs
- Voice samples, approved facts/sources, client-owned account access and one factual/brand approver.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly batch; draft delivery at least 5 business days before agreed first publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Interview and approve topic list
- Draft four original posts
- Obtain consolidated approval
- Publish on agreed schedule or handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Original illustrations or video
- Daily engagement/community management
- Separate LinkedIn articles/newsletters
- Additional author profiles
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLinkedIn Ghostwriting$2,200 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 4 original long-form LinkedIn posts per month: Four distinct posts in the client’s voice, up to 500 words each, with hook, CTA and source/fact checks from supplied materials.
- 1 voice interview per month: One 30-minute interview and review of up to five supplied writing samples.
- 4 LinkedIn publishing placements: Four approved posts to one profile on the agreed schedule; editable copy handoff if publishing access is unavailable.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One LinkedIn profile and one named voice/author; four placements/month.
- Pages, words and records
- Four original posts, up to 500 words each; five voice samples; no automatic duplicate article/newsletter versions.
- Formats
- Editable text/native LinkedIn post, tracked CTA link where supported; supplied image alt text if applicable.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute monthly voice interview; written approval of all four posts.
- Client inputs
- Voice samples, approved facts/sources, client-owned account access and one factual/brand approver.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly batch; draft delivery at least 5 business days before agreed first publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Interview and approve topic list
- Draft four original posts
- Obtain consolidated approval
- Publish on agreed schedule or handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Original illustrations or video
- Daily engagement/community management
- Separate LinkedIn articles/newsletters
- Additional author profiles
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Single Platform ManagementSocial MediaIncluded scope and billingSingle Platform Management$3,000 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 3 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 12 original feed content units per month: 10 still/carousel units (up to 2 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 2 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
- 12 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
- 12 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 1 platform using the shared original pool.
- 30 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 30 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
- 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 30-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One named social platform and one profile; no separate story distribution is included.
- Pages, words and records
- 12 originals including 2 videos; up to 2 carousels of five slides each; 12 feed placements; 30 routine interaction threads. No additional-platform adaptations or story placements are included.
- Formats
- Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 30-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
- Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
- Consolidated client approval
- Schedule placements and handle routine community
- Report monthly delivery and limits
Separate costs and exclusions- Original onsite filming or photography
- Paid-media management or ad spend
- Influencer sourcing
- Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
- Standalone 12-video pack
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSingle Platform Management$3,000 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 3 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 12 original feed content units per month: 10 still/carousel units (up to 2 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 2 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
- 12 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
- 12 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 1 platform using the shared original pool.
- 30 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 30 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
- 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 30-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One named social platform and one profile; no separate story distribution is included.
- Pages, words and records
- 12 originals including 2 videos; up to 2 carousels of five slides each; 12 feed placements; 30 routine interaction threads. No additional-platform adaptations or story placements are included.
- Formats
- Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 30-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
- Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
- Consolidated client approval
- Schedule placements and handle routine community
- Report monthly delivery and limits
Separate costs and exclusions- Original onsite filming or photography
- Paid-media management or ad spend
- Influencer sourcing
- Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
- Standalone 12-video pack
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
All Active Profiles — Audit and Cleanup by Accepted InventorySocial MediaIncluded scope and billingAll Active Profiles — Audit and Cleanup by Accepted Inventory$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 complete accepted profile inventory: Identify every active client profile and available fields before acceptance; proposed starting envelope is six accounts.
- 1 cross-profile identity matrix: Normalize display name/handle where available, bio, link, category and contact details across every accepted account.
- 1 image refresh set per inventory: One shared supplied-image treatment and up to one cover/banner adaptation for each accepted supported account.
- 1 access/status log: Record changes, inaccessible fields, platform approvals, ownership/access method and handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Every profile named in the accepted inventory; proposed starting envelope six profiles, with exact count agreed before acceptance.
- Pages, words and records
- One shared 150-word bio plus platform edits, one profile-image treatment and one cover adaptation per accepted profile.
- Formats
- Native profile fields; platform-sized JPEG/PNG; editable identity/access matrix.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute inventory meeting and one 45-minute review/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Complete account inventory, delegated access, approved business details, brand files and permissions.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks for the accepted inventory, excluding platform verification/review after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm complete profile inventory
- Draft normalized identity matrix
- Apply approved fields and images
- Document status/access and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Account recovery or suspension appeals
- New brand identity
- Ongoing posting
- Paid platform verification
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingAll Active Profiles — Audit and Cleanup by Accepted Inventory$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 complete accepted profile inventory: Identify every active client profile and available fields before acceptance; proposed starting envelope is six accounts.
- 1 cross-profile identity matrix: Normalize display name/handle where available, bio, link, category and contact details across every accepted account.
- 1 image refresh set per inventory: One shared supplied-image treatment and up to one cover/banner adaptation for each accepted supported account.
- 1 access/status log: Record changes, inaccessible fields, platform approvals, ownership/access method and handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Every profile named in the accepted inventory; proposed starting envelope six profiles, with exact count agreed before acceptance.
- Pages, words and records
- One shared 150-word bio plus platform edits, one profile-image treatment and one cover adaptation per accepted profile.
- Formats
- Native profile fields; platform-sized JPEG/PNG; editable identity/access matrix.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute inventory meeting and one 45-minute review/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Complete account inventory, delegated access, approved business details, brand files and permissions.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 2 business weeks for the accepted inventory, excluding platform verification/review after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm complete profile inventory
- Draft normalized identity matrix
- Apply approved fields and images
- Document status/access and handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Account recovery or suspension appeals
- New brand identity
- Ongoing posting
- Paid platform verification
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Content Bank (30 Posts, One Batch)Social MediaIncluded scope and billingContent Bank (30 Posts, One Batch)$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 30 original evergreen written-and-designed posts: 30 distinct message concepts; each includes one still or one carousel up to five slides, with at most 10 carousels in the batch.
- 30 caption/CTA/accessibility packages: Up to 250 words each, hook, CTA/link, up to eight hashtags and applicable image alt text.
- 30 additional aspect-ratio exports: One additional agreed aspect-ratio adaptation per original; these are derivatives, not 30 extra originals.
- 1 scheduling import or organized handoff: Import the 30 approved posts once into a provided compatible scheduling tool, or deliver indexed files and import-ready calendar.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, primary platform and compatible client-owned scheduler; one extra aspect-ratio export per post.
- Pages, words and records
- 30 originals, maximum 10 five-slide carousels, 30 captions and 30 derivative exports; no video or story sequence implied.
- Formats
- Primary 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 JPEG/PNG; one extra agreed ratio; editable captions/alt text; CSV schedule.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute topic/brand brief and one 45-minute batch review.
- Client inputs
- Approved evergreen topics, brand templates, selected licensed images, destination links and scheduler access if desired.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 3 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated batch revision rounds across the 30 approved directions. New topics or a replaced brand direction after approval require written change scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve 30-topic matrix
- Produce originals and captions
- Complete consolidated batch revisions
- Prepare derivative exports
- Import once or handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Daily publishing or community support
- Original filming or video posts
- Paid-media management
- Future content changes after accepted handoff
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingContent Bank (30 Posts, One Batch)$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 30 original evergreen written-and-designed posts: 30 distinct message concepts; each includes one still or one carousel up to five slides, with at most 10 carousels in the batch.
- 30 caption/CTA/accessibility packages: Up to 250 words each, hook, CTA/link, up to eight hashtags and applicable image alt text.
- 30 additional aspect-ratio exports: One additional agreed aspect-ratio adaptation per original; these are derivatives, not 30 extra originals.
- 1 scheduling import or organized handoff: Import the 30 approved posts once into a provided compatible scheduling tool, or deliver indexed files and import-ready calendar.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, primary platform and compatible client-owned scheduler; one extra aspect-ratio export per post.
- Pages, words and records
- 30 originals, maximum 10 five-slide carousels, 30 captions and 30 derivative exports; no video or story sequence implied.
- Formats
- Primary 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 JPEG/PNG; one extra agreed ratio; editable captions/alt text; CSV schedule.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute topic/brand brief and one 45-minute batch review.
- Client inputs
- Approved evergreen topics, brand templates, selected licensed images, destination links and scheduler access if desired.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 3 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated batch revision rounds across the 30 approved directions. New topics or a replaced brand direction after approval require written change scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve 30-topic matrix
- Produce originals and captions
- Complete consolidated batch revisions
- Prepare derivative exports
- Import once or handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Daily publishing or community support
- Original filming or video posts
- Paid-media management
- Future content changes after accepted handoff
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $4,500 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Two Platform Management BundleSocial MediaIncluded scope and billingTwo Platform Management Bundle$5,300 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 16 original feed content units per month: 12 still/carousel units (up to 4 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 4 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
- 16 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
- 16 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 1 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
- 32 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 2 platforms using the shared original pool.
- 4 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 12 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 24 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
- 60 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 60 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
- 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 45-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 2 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- 16 originals including 4 videos; 4 carousels at up to five slides; 16 added platform adaptations; 32 feed placements; 4 story sets/12 frames/24 story placements; 60 interactions.
- Formats
- Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 45-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
- Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
- Consolidated client approval
- Schedule placements and handle routine community
- Report monthly delivery and limits
Separate costs and exclusions- Original onsite filming or photography
- Paid-media management or ad spend
- Influencer sourcing
- Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
- Standalone 12-video pack
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingTwo Platform Management Bundle$5,300 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 16 original feed content units per month: 12 still/carousel units (up to 4 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 4 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
- 16 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
- 16 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 1 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
- 32 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 2 platforms using the shared original pool.
- 4 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 12 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 24 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
- 60 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 60 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
- 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 45-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 2 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- 16 originals including 4 videos; 4 carousels at up to five slides; 16 added platform adaptations; 32 feed placements; 4 story sets/12 frames/24 story placements; 60 interactions.
- Formats
- Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 45-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
- Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
- Consolidated client approval
- Schedule placements and handle routine community
- Report monthly delivery and limits
Separate costs and exclusions- Original onsite filming or photography
- Paid-media management or ad spend
- Influencer sourcing
- Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
- Standalone 12-video pack
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $5,300 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Short Form Video Pack (12 Reels/TikToks)Social MediaIncluded scope and billingShort Form Video Pack (12 Reels/TikToks)$5,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 12 distinct vertical videos: 12 videos, each 15–60 seconds: hook, edited sequence, basic color/audio adjustment, readable captions, CTA/end frame and cover.
- 1 footage production route: Either up to 120 selected minutes of client-supplied licensed footage OR one half-day shoot, up to 240 minutes, at the GCM office using an agreed shot list; both routes are not automatically combined.
- 12 caption and delivery packages: One caption up to 150 words and one MP4 master/cover per video; transcript/caption file where supported.
- 12 publishing placements or file handoff: One placement per approved video to one named primary profile on the agreed schedule, or indexed file handoff; additional cross-platform placements require accepted scope.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand/act and one primary publishing profile; one 240-minute office shoot OR selected supplied footage route.
- Pages, words and records
- 12 distinct videos at 15–60 seconds, 12 captions and 12 covers; up to 120 selected input minutes; 12 placements if access provided.
- Formats
- 1080×1920 H.264 MP4, readable captions, cover JPEG/PNG and editable caption text; current platform specs confirmed.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute concept/shot-list meeting and one 45-minute batch review; shoot route includes up to 240 minutes at the office.
- Client inputs
- Approved themes/claims, selected footage OR available subjects for office shoot, releases/permissions, brand assets, cleared audio and publishing access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated batch edit rounds within the approved 12 concepts; production corrections distinguished from new concepts, new footage or reshoots.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve 12-video matrix and footage route
- Capture office session or ingest selected footage
- Edit/caption and review batch
- Complete revisions
- Publish agreed placements or handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Travel or offsite venue filming
- Performers, hired studio or specialist crew
- Custom animation
- Commercial music licensing
- 36 cross-platform publishing placements by default
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingShort Form Video Pack (12 Reels/TikToks)$5,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 12 distinct vertical videos: 12 videos, each 15–60 seconds: hook, edited sequence, basic color/audio adjustment, readable captions, CTA/end frame and cover.
- 1 footage production route: Either up to 120 selected minutes of client-supplied licensed footage OR one half-day shoot, up to 240 minutes, at the GCM office using an agreed shot list; both routes are not automatically combined.
- 12 caption and delivery packages: One caption up to 150 words and one MP4 master/cover per video; transcript/caption file where supported.
- 12 publishing placements or file handoff: One placement per approved video to one named primary profile on the agreed schedule, or indexed file handoff; additional cross-platform placements require accepted scope.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand/act and one primary publishing profile; one 240-minute office shoot OR selected supplied footage route.
- Pages, words and records
- 12 distinct videos at 15–60 seconds, 12 captions and 12 covers; up to 120 selected input minutes; 12 placements if access provided.
- Formats
- 1080×1920 H.264 MP4, readable captions, cover JPEG/PNG and editable caption text; current platform specs confirmed.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute concept/shot-list meeting and one 45-minute batch review; shoot route includes up to 240 minutes at the office.
- Client inputs
- Approved themes/claims, selected footage OR available subjects for office shoot, releases/permissions, brand assets, cleared audio and publishing access.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated batch edit rounds within the approved 12 concepts; production corrections distinguished from new concepts, new footage or reshoots.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve 12-video matrix and footage route
- Capture office session or ingest selected footage
- Edit/caption and review batch
- Complete revisions
- Publish agreed placements or handoff
Separate costs and exclusions- Travel or offsite venue filming
- Performers, hired studio or specialist crew
- Custom animation
- Commercial music licensing
- 36 cross-platform publishing placements by default
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $5,500 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Three Platform Management BundleSocial MediaIncluded scope and billingThree Platform Management Bundle$7,300 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 20 original feed content units per month: 14 still/carousel units (up to 4 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 6 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
- 20 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
- 40 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 2 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
- 60 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 3 platforms using the shared original pool.
- 6 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 18 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 36 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
- 90 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 90 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
- 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 45-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 3 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- 20 originals including 6 videos; 4 carousels at up to five slides; 40 added platform adaptations; 60 feed placements; 6 story sets/18 frames/36 story placements; 90 interactions.
- Formats
- Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 45-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
- Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
- Consolidated client approval
- Schedule placements and handle routine community
- Report monthly delivery and limits
Separate costs and exclusions- Original onsite filming or photography
- Paid-media management or ad spend
- Influencer sourcing
- Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
- Standalone 12-video pack
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingThree Platform Management Bundle$7,300 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 20 original feed content units per month: 14 still/carousel units (up to 4 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 6 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
- 20 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
- 40 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 2 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
- 60 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 3 platforms using the shared original pool.
- 6 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 18 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 36 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
- 90 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 90 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
- 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 45-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 3 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- 20 originals including 6 videos; 4 carousels at up to five slides; 40 added platform adaptations; 60 feed placements; 6 story sets/18 frames/36 story placements; 90 interactions.
- Formats
- Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 45-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
- Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
- Consolidated client approval
- Schedule placements and handle routine community
- Report monthly delivery and limits
Separate costs and exclusions- Original onsite filming or photography
- Paid-media management or ad spend
- Influencer sourcing
- Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
- Standalone 12-video pack
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $7,300 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Full Social Media Management — Four-Platform Base; Additional Accounts by ScopeSocial MediaIncluded scope and billingFull Social Media Management — Four-Platform Base; Additional Accounts by Scope$9,400 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 24 original feed content units per month: 16 still/carousel units (up to 6 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 8 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
- 24 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
- 72 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 3 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
- 96 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 4 platforms using the shared original pool.
- 8 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 24 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 48 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
- 120 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 120 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
- 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 60-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 4 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- 24 originals including 8 videos; 6 carousels at up to five slides; 72 added platform adaptations; 96 feed placements; 8 story sets/24 frames/48 story placements; 120 interactions.
- Formats
- Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 60-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
- Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
- Consolidated client approval
- Schedule placements and handle routine community
- Report monthly delivery and limits
Separate costs and exclusions- Original onsite filming or photography
- Paid-media management or ad spend
- Influencer sourcing
- Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
- Standalone 12-video pack
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingFull Social Media Management — Four-Platform Base; Additional Accounts by Scope$9,400 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 24 original feed content units per month: 16 still/carousel units (up to 6 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 8 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
- 24 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
- 72 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 3 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
- 96 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 4 platforms using the shared original pool.
- 8 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 24 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 48 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
- 120 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 120 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
- 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 60-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 4 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- 24 originals including 8 videos; 6 carousels at up to five slides; 72 added platform adaptations; 96 feed placements; 8 story sets/24 frames/48 story placements; 120 interactions.
- Formats
- Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 60-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
- Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
- Consolidated client approval
- Schedule placements and handle routine community
- Report monthly delivery and limits
Separate costs and exclusions- Original onsite filming or photography
- Paid-media management or ad spend
- Influencer sourcing
- Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
- Standalone 12-video pack
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $9,400 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Press Release DistributionAdvertising & PRIncluded scope and billingPress Release Distribution$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 press release distribution package: Distribute one client-approved release to up to 25 suitable local/trade/niche editorial contacts; list qualification, individualized email intro and one follow-up after 3 business days where appropriate; submission/delivery/response ledger.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One approved story, one release, up to 25 qualified editorial contacts and one follow-up per contact.
- Pages, words and records
- One approved story, one release, up to 25 qualified editorial contacts and one follow-up per contact.
- Formats
- Editable contact/response ledger and email delivery log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute distribution briefing.
- Client inputs
- Approved release, source links, spokesperson contact, permitted outreach identity and target exclusions.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated target-list correction before sending; approved facts corrected before follow-up.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Presswire/paid-placement costs, release writing and interview facilitation separate; placements/open rates/replies not guaranteed.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPress Release Distribution$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 press release distribution package: Distribute one client-approved release to up to 25 suitable local/trade/niche editorial contacts; list qualification, individualized email intro and one follow-up after 3 business days where appropriate; submission/delivery/response ledger.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One approved story, one release, up to 25 qualified editorial contacts and one follow-up per contact.
- Pages, words and records
- One approved story, one release, up to 25 qualified editorial contacts and one follow-up per contact.
- Formats
- Editable contact/response ledger and email delivery log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute distribution briefing.
- Client inputs
- Approved release, source links, spokesperson contact, permitted outreach identity and target exclusions.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated target-list correction before sending; approved facts corrected before follow-up.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Presswire/paid-placement costs, release writing and interview facilitation separate; placements/open rates/replies not guaranteed.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Single Ad Creative, One PlatformAdvertising & PRIncluded scope and billingSingle Ad Creative, One Platform$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 single ad creative, one platform package: One static ad concept for one named platform; one headline/body/CTA, one master design and up to 3 placement sizes; two consolidated refinements; export files and copy.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one static concept, one named ad platform and up to three named placements.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand, one static concept, one named ad platform and up to three named placements.
- Formats
- JPG/PNG exports and editable copy; source design in the agreed licensed tool.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute creative briefing and one 20-minute review.
- Client inputs
- Brand assets, offer, audience, substantiated claims and platform placement specifications.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds on the single approved concept.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad account setup, spend, placement management, filmed video and alternate concepts separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSingle Ad Creative, One Platform$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 single ad creative, one platform package: One static ad concept for one named platform; one headline/body/CTA, one master design and up to 3 placement sizes; two consolidated refinements; export files and copy.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one static concept, one named ad platform and up to three named placements.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand, one static concept, one named ad platform and up to three named placements.
- Formats
- JPG/PNG exports and editable copy; source design in the agreed licensed tool.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute creative briefing and one 20-minute review.
- Client inputs
- Brand assets, offer, audience, substantiated claims and platform placement specifications.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds on the single approved concept.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad account setup, spend, placement management, filmed video and alternate concepts separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Press Release WritingAdvertising & PRIncluded scope and billingPress Release Writing$1,900 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 press release writing package: One press release 400–700 words, headline/deck, client-approved facts, boilerplate/contact and embargo note if needed; up to 2 revisions; editable file and PDF.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization, one news event and one 400–700-word release including boilerplate/contact.
- Pages, words and records
- One organization, one news event and one 400–700-word release including boilerplate/contact.
- Formats
- DOCX and PDF; headline, deck and embargo line if required.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute news briefing.
- Client inputs
- Approved facts, dates, quotes, contact information and one authorized spokesperson.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revision rounds.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Distribution, interviews beyond one 30-minute briefing, original photography and legal approval separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPress Release Writing$1,900 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 press release writing package: One press release 400–700 words, headline/deck, client-approved facts, boilerplate/contact and embargo note if needed; up to 2 revisions; editable file and PDF.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization, one news event and one 400–700-word release including boilerplate/contact.
- Pages, words and records
- One organization, one news event and one 400–700-word release including boilerplate/contact.
- Formats
- DOCX and PDF; headline, deck and embargo line if required.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute news briefing.
- Client inputs
- Approved facts, dates, quotes, contact information and one authorized spokesperson.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revision rounds.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Distribution, interviews beyond one 30-minute briefing, original photography and legal approval separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,900 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Print Ad DesignAdvertising & PRIncluded scope and billingPrint Ad Design$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 print ad design package: One print ad for one outlet/specification; copy up to 150 words, one design, up to 2 revisions, proof and print-ready PDF.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one outlet, one ad size and up to 150 words.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand, one outlet, one ad size and up to 150 words.
- Formats
- Print-ready PDF to supplied bleed/color specifications; one digital proof.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute briefing and one 20-minute proof review.
- Client inputs
- Outlet specification, booking deadline, approved offer/copy and licensed images.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds before final proof.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Publication/printing fees, original photography, outlet charges and additional ad sizes separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPrint Ad Design$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 print ad design package: One print ad for one outlet/specification; copy up to 150 words, one design, up to 2 revisions, proof and print-ready PDF.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one outlet, one ad size and up to 150 words.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand, one outlet, one ad size and up to 150 words.
- Formats
- Print-ready PDF to supplied bleed/color specifications; one digital proof.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute briefing and one 20-minute proof review.
- Client inputs
- Outlet specification, booking deadline, approved offer/copy and licensed images.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds before final proof.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Publication/printing fees, original photography, outlet charges and additional ad sizes separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Media KitAdvertising & PRIncluded scope and billingMedia Kit$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 media kit package: One coordinated PDF and web-ready media kit: 2 bio lengths, one 2-page fact sheet, 5 short introductions, up to 10 supplied edited photos, press/contact links and downloadable asset zip; PDF up to 12 pages, web version up to one existing-page layout.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand/artist, PDF up to 12 pages, two bio lengths, two-page fact sheet, five introductions and ten supplied photos.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand/artist, PDF up to 12 pages, two bio lengths, two-page fact sheet, five introductions and ten supplied photos.
- Formats
- PDF, content/layout on one existing web page, edited JPEG selects and one ZIP.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute intake and one 30-minute kit review.
- Client inputs
- Existing bios, facts, press links, licensed photo originals and access to one existing web page.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated kit revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- New photoshoot, new site/domain/build, extensive archive restoration, rights clearance and outreach separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMedia Kit$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 media kit package: One coordinated PDF and web-ready media kit: 2 bio lengths, one 2-page fact sheet, 5 short introductions, up to 10 supplied edited photos, press/contact links and downloadable asset zip; PDF up to 12 pages, web version up to one existing-page layout.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand/artist, PDF up to 12 pages, two bio lengths, two-page fact sheet, five introductions and ten supplied photos.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand/artist, PDF up to 12 pages, two bio lengths, two-page fact sheet, five introductions and ten supplied photos.
- Formats
- PDF, content/layout on one existing web page, edited JPEG selects and one ZIP.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute intake and one 30-minute kit review.
- Client inputs
- Existing bios, facts, press links, licensed photo originals and access to one existing web page.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated kit revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- New photoshoot, new site/domain/build, extensive archive restoration, rights clearance and outreach separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Out of Home / Billboard CreativeAdvertising & PRIncluded scope and billingOut of Home / Billboard Creative$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 out of home / billboard creative package: One large-format concept, headline up to 12 words and up to 3 agreed production sizes; two consolidated revisions; vector/print-ready output and vendor-spec check.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One concept and three named billboard/transit production sizes; headline up to 12 words.
- Pages, words and records
- One concept and three named billboard/transit production sizes; headline up to 12 words.
- Formats
- Vector/PDF production files and JPG proofs to three supplied vendor templates.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute briefing and one 30-minute vendor-proof review.
- Client inputs
- Vendor dimensions, viewing context, substantiated message, marks and licensed imagery.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds on the approved concept.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Media rental, print/install/permit costs, vehicle measurements and 3D mockups separate; final vendor proof approval required.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingOut of Home / Billboard Creative$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 out of home / billboard creative package: One large-format concept, headline up to 12 words and up to 3 agreed production sizes; two consolidated revisions; vector/print-ready output and vendor-spec check.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One concept and three named billboard/transit production sizes; headline up to 12 words.
- Pages, words and records
- One concept and three named billboard/transit production sizes; headline up to 12 words.
- Formats
- Vector/PDF production files and JPG proofs to three supplied vendor templates.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute briefing and one 30-minute vendor-proof review.
- Client inputs
- Vendor dimensions, viewing context, substantiated message, marks and licensed imagery.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds on the approved concept.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Media rental, print/install/permit costs, vehicle measurements and 3D mockups separate; final vendor proof approval required.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $4,500 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Multi Platform Ad Creative PackAdvertising & PRIncluded scope and billingMulti Platform Ad Creative Pack$4,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 multi platform ad creative pack package: One campaign concept adapted to 5 named platforms; one static master design, headline/body/CTA adapted per platform and up to 3 placement sizes/platform (15 exports); two consolidated refinements.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One concept; five named platforms; three named placements per platform, 15 exports total.
- Pages, words and records
- One concept; five named platforms; three named placements per platform, 15 exports total.
- Formats
- Static JPG/PNG/PDF as specified; one headline/body/CTA adaptation per platform.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute matrix review.
- Client inputs
- Approved campaign brief, licensed assets and a five-platform placement matrix.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds across the complete batch.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional platforms, additional placement sizes beyond the named matrix, original animation/video, media buying/management and third-party licenses require a quote. Existing accepted all-sizing commitments remain unchanged.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMulti Platform Ad Creative Pack$4,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 multi platform ad creative pack package: One campaign concept adapted to 5 named platforms; one static master design, headline/body/CTA adapted per platform and up to 3 placement sizes/platform (15 exports); two consolidated refinements.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One concept; five named platforms; three named placements per platform, 15 exports total.
- Pages, words and records
- One concept; five named platforms; three named placements per platform, 15 exports total.
- Formats
- Static JPG/PNG/PDF as specified; one headline/body/CTA adaptation per platform.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute matrix review.
- Client inputs
- Approved campaign brief, licensed assets and a five-platform placement matrix.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds across the complete batch.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional platforms, additional placement sizes beyond the named matrix, original animation/video, media buying/management and third-party licenses require a quote. Existing accepted all-sizing commitments remain unchanged.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $4,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Local Media Outreach CampaignAdvertising & PRIncluded scope and billingLocal Media Outreach Campaign$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 local media outreach campaign package: One local story over four weeks; 15–25 qualified outlets, one primary pitch, two appropriate follow-up rounds, two 30-minute interview-preparation sessions, coordination of up to three interviews and one outreach/response report.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One local story, 15–25 suitable outlets and two follow-up rounds during four weeks; three interview arrangements.
- Pages, words and records
- One local story, 15–25 suitable outlets and two follow-up rounds during four weeks; three interview arrangements.
- Formats
- Pitch emails, source packet, contact/response ledger and PDF report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff and two 30-minute interview-preparation sessions.
- Client inputs
- Approved facts, spokesperson availability, target exclusions and approved media assets.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 4 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds on the angle/initial pitch before sending.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- No paid placement, guaranteed coverage, crisis PR or unlimited interviews; release writing only if stated in accepted bundle.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLocal Media Outreach Campaign$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 local media outreach campaign package: One local story over four weeks; 15–25 qualified outlets, one primary pitch, two appropriate follow-up rounds, two 30-minute interview-preparation sessions, coordination of up to three interviews and one outreach/response report.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One local story, 15–25 suitable outlets and two follow-up rounds during four weeks; three interview arrangements.
- Pages, words and records
- One local story, 15–25 suitable outlets and two follow-up rounds during four weeks; three interview arrangements.
- Formats
- Pitch emails, source packet, contact/response ledger and PDF report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff and two 30-minute interview-preparation sessions.
- Client inputs
- Approved facts, spokesperson availability, target exclusions and approved media assets.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 4 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds on the angle/initial pitch before sending.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- No paid placement, guaranteed coverage, crisis PR or unlimited interviews; release writing only if stated in accepted bundle.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
PR RetainerAdvertising & PRIncluded scope and billingPR Retainer$6,300 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 1 pr retainer package: One pitch effort per month to 20 suitable contacts with up to two follow-up rounds; up to three reactive media inquiries handled with client-approved facts; one monthly report and one 60-minute quarterly story-planning session. Separate release writing is included only when expressly named in the accepted scope.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization; one monthly pitch effort to 20 contacts, two follow-ups, three reactive media inquiries and one report per month.
- Pages, words and records
- One organization; one monthly pitch effort to 20 contacts, two follow-ups, three reactive media inquiries and one report per month.
- Formats
- Editable pitch/response records and monthly PDF report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding; one 30-minute monthly review and one 60-minute quarterly story session.
- Client inputs
- Monthly news priorities, approved facts, available spokesperson and escalation contact.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Monthly, 6-month minimum. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated pitch revisions per month; factual corrections on the three included reactive responses.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Crisis PR, continuous on-call support, paid placements and original capture require separate scope.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPR Retainer$6,300 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 1 pr retainer package: One pitch effort per month to 20 suitable contacts with up to two follow-up rounds; up to three reactive media inquiries handled with client-approved facts; one monthly report and one 60-minute quarterly story-planning session. Separate release writing is included only when expressly named in the accepted scope.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization; one monthly pitch effort to 20 contacts, two follow-ups, three reactive media inquiries and one report per month.
- Pages, words and records
- One organization; one monthly pitch effort to 20 contacts, two follow-ups, three reactive media inquiries and one report per month.
- Formats
- Editable pitch/response records and monthly PDF report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding; one 30-minute monthly review and one 60-minute quarterly story session.
- Client inputs
- Monthly news priorities, approved facts, available spokesperson and escalation contact.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Monthly, 6-month minimum. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated pitch revisions per month; factual corrections on the three included reactive responses.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Crisis PR, continuous on-call support, paid placements and original capture require separate scope.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,300 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Magazine or Feature Placement EffortAdvertising & PRIncluded scope and billingMagazine or Feature Placement Effort$11,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 magazine or feature placement effort package: One feature angle, 20 regional/national editorial targets, one interview/source packet, personalized pitches and two follow-up rounds; two 45-minute preparation sessions, coordination of four interviews and a final response ledger.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One feature angle, 20 editorial targets, two follow-up rounds and four interview arrangements over 6–8 weeks.
- Pages, words and records
- One feature angle, 20 editorial targets, two follow-up rounds and four interview arrangements over 6–8 weeks.
- Formats
- Interview/source packet, pitch emails, response ledger and final PDF report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute story briefing and two 45-minute interview-preparation sessions.
- Client inputs
- Evidence supporting the story, sources, available spokesperson and licensed media.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 6 to 8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds on the feature angle/pitch and one factual packet correction.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Editorial acceptance/publication date and travel outside GCM control; photography, presswire fees and additional feature angles separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMagazine or Feature Placement Effort$11,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 magazine or feature placement effort package: One feature angle, 20 regional/national editorial targets, one interview/source packet, personalized pitches and two follow-up rounds; two 45-minute preparation sessions, coordination of four interviews and a final response ledger.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One feature angle, 20 editorial targets, two follow-up rounds and four interview arrangements over 6–8 weeks.
- Pages, words and records
- One feature angle, 20 editorial targets, two follow-up rounds and four interview arrangements over 6–8 weeks.
- Formats
- Interview/source packet, pitch emails, response ledger and final PDF report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute story briefing and two 45-minute interview-preparation sessions.
- Client inputs
- Evidence supporting the story, sources, available spokesperson and licensed media.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 6 to 8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds on the feature angle/pitch and one factual packet correction.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Editorial acceptance/publication date and travel outside GCM control; photography, presswire fees and additional feature angles separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $11,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Newsletter Copy (per Issue)Content & CopywritingIncluded scope and billingNewsletter Copy (per Issue)$625 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 newsletter copy (per issue) package: One 300–600-word newsletter, two subject-line variants and a preheader, one documented subject-line comparison/test recommendation, one consolidated revision and editable delivery. One native A/B subject-line send is included only when the client already has a suitable configured platform/list and approves the send; no additional distribution fee is charged for that expressly accepted test.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One newsletter of 300–600 words, two subject variants, one preheader and one CTA.
- Pages, words and records
- One newsletter of 300–600 words, two subject variants, one preheader and one CTA.
- Formats
- Editable DOCX/Google Doc and PDF; one documented subject-line comparison.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute issue briefing.
- Client inputs
- Approved topic, offer, audience, links and one brand-voice sample.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 days. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision, preserving the published allowance.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Newsletter layout/design, new list/platform configuration and ongoing distribution beyond the explicitly included subject-line test require a separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingNewsletter Copy (per Issue)$625 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 newsletter copy (per issue) package: One 300–600-word newsletter, two subject-line variants and a preheader, one documented subject-line comparison/test recommendation, one consolidated revision and editable delivery. One native A/B subject-line send is included only when the client already has a suitable configured platform/list and approves the send; no additional distribution fee is charged for that expressly accepted test.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One newsletter of 300–600 words, two subject variants, one preheader and one CTA.
- Pages, words and records
- One newsletter of 300–600 words, two subject variants, one preheader and one CTA.
- Formats
- Editable DOCX/Google Doc and PDF; one documented subject-line comparison.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute issue briefing.
- Client inputs
- Approved topic, offer, audience, links and one brand-voice sample.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 days. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision, preserving the published allowance.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Newsletter layout/design, new list/platform configuration and ongoing distribution beyond the explicitly included subject-line test require a separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $625 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Bio WritingContent & CopywritingIncluded scope and billingBio Writing$625 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 bio writing package: One interview up to 30 minutes; 3 biography lengths (up to 600/250/75 words) and up to 2 revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One subject; one interview; three biography lengths capped at 600, 250 and 75 words.
- Pages, words and records
- One subject; one interview; three biography lengths capped at 600, 250 and 75 words.
- Formats
- DOCX/Google Doc and PDF.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute interview.
- Client inputs
- Current biographical facts, milestones, preferred pronouns, credentials and factual approver.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions across the three versions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Extra subjects, full CV/resume, research interviews and layout separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBio Writing$625 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 bio writing package: One interview up to 30 minutes; 3 biography lengths (up to 600/250/75 words) and up to 2 revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One subject; one interview; three biography lengths capped at 600, 250 and 75 words.
- Pages, words and records
- One subject; one interview; three biography lengths capped at 600, 250 and 75 words.
- Formats
- DOCX/Google Doc and PDF.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute interview.
- Client inputs
- Current biographical facts, milestones, preferred pronouns, credentials and factual approver.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions across the three versions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Extra subjects, full CV/resume, research interviews and layout separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $625 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Editing or Proofreading PassContent & CopywritingIncluded scope and billingEditing or Proofreading Pass$875 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 editing or proofreading pass package: One line-edit/proofread pass up to 3000 words; style/consistency comments and tracked changes; one clarification response.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One supplied manuscript up to 3,000 words and one line-edit/proofreading pass.
- Pages, words and records
- One supplied manuscript up to 3,000 words and one line-edit/proofreading pass.
- Formats
- DOCX tracked changes, clean DOCX and concise style/consistency notes.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute editorial briefing.
- Client inputs
- Editable manuscript, target readership, style guide and references already used.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated clarification/correction response; a replacement manuscript is a new scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Substantive rewriting, source verification, new research, layout and additional manuscript versions separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingEditing or Proofreading Pass$875 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 editing or proofreading pass package: One line-edit/proofread pass up to 3000 words; style/consistency comments and tracked changes; one clarification response.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One supplied manuscript up to 3,000 words and one line-edit/proofreading pass.
- Pages, words and records
- One supplied manuscript up to 3,000 words and one line-edit/proofreading pass.
- Formats
- DOCX tracked changes, clean DOCX and concise style/consistency notes.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute editorial briefing.
- Client inputs
- Editable manuscript, target readership, style guide and references already used.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated clarification/correction response; a replacement manuscript is a new scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Substantive rewriting, source verification, new research, layout and additional manuscript versions separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $875 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Single Blog Post or ArticleContent & CopywritingIncluded scope and billingSingle Blog Post or Article$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 single blog post or article package: One researched article of 800–1500 words; up to 5 documented sources, one title/meta description/header structure, up to 2 revisions; editable delivery.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One article of 800–1,500 words and up to five documented sources.
- Pages, words and records
- One article of 800–1,500 words and up to five documented sources.
- Formats
- DOCX/Google Doc, title, meta description and header structure.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute editorial briefing.
- Client inputs
- Approved topic, audience, source access and brand-voice example.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Expert interviews beyond one supplied briefing, original images, publishing and proprietary/paywalled research separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSingle Blog Post or Article$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 single blog post or article package: One researched article of 800–1500 words; up to 5 documented sources, one title/meta description/header structure, up to 2 revisions; editable delivery.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One article of 800–1,500 words and up to five documented sources.
- Pages, words and records
- One article of 800–1,500 words and up to five documented sources.
- Formats
- DOCX/Google Doc, title, meta description and header structure.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute editorial briefing.
- Client inputs
- Approved topic, audience, source access and brand-voice example.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Expert interviews beyond one supplied briefing, original images, publishing and proprietary/paywalled research separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Artist StatementContent & CopywritingIncluded scope and billingArtist Statement$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 artist statement package: One 45-minute artist interview; long statement 500–700 words and short version 150–250 words; up to 3 revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One artist; one statement in 500–700-word and 150–250-word versions.
- Pages, words and records
- One artist; one statement in 500–700-word and 150–250-word versions.
- Formats
- DOCX/Google Doc and PDF.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute interview.
- Client inputs
- Work samples, practice context, application requirements and approved biographical facts.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Three consolidated revisions across the two versions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Application/grant package, translation, artwork photography and submission separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingArtist Statement$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 artist statement package: One 45-minute artist interview; long statement 500–700 words and short version 150–250 words; up to 3 revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One artist; one statement in 500–700-word and 150–250-word versions.
- Pages, words and records
- One artist; one statement in 500–700-word and 150–250-word versions.
- Formats
- DOCX/Google Doc and PDF.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute interview.
- Client inputs
- Work samples, practice context, application requirements and approved biographical facts.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Three consolidated revisions across the two versions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Application/grant package, translation, artwork photography and submission separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Practice Area Page (Law Firm)Content & CopywritingIncluded scope and billingPractice Area Page (Law Firm)$1,400 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 practice area page (law firm) package: One practice area page 800–1200 words, one attorney briefing up to 30 minutes, carefully sourced factual/claims review, title/meta/CTA and up to 2 revisions; attorney approves legal accuracy and publication.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One law firm, one practice area and one 800–1,200-word page.
- Pages, words and records
- One law firm, one practice area and one 800–1,200-word page.
- Formats
- DOCX with source notes, title, meta description and CTA.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute attorney briefing.
- Client inputs
- Responsible attorney, practice facts, jurisdictions, approved claims and existing brand language.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions; attorney reviews legal accuracy and advertising requirements before publication.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- GCM does not provide legal opinion/compliance guarantee. Bar filing/fees, build and attorney professional review separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPractice Area Page (Law Firm)$1,400 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 practice area page (law firm) package: One practice area page 800–1200 words, one attorney briefing up to 30 minutes, carefully sourced factual/claims review, title/meta/CTA and up to 2 revisions; attorney approves legal accuracy and publication.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One law firm, one practice area and one 800–1,200-word page.
- Pages, words and records
- One law firm, one practice area and one 800–1,200-word page.
- Formats
- DOCX with source notes, title, meta description and CTA.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute attorney briefing.
- Client inputs
- Responsible attorney, practice facts, jurisdictions, approved claims and existing brand language.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions; attorney reviews legal accuracy and advertising requirements before publication.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- GCM does not provide legal opinion/compliance guarantee. Bar filing/fees, build and attorney professional review separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,400 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
About Page RewriteContent & CopywritingIncluded scope and billingAbout Page Rewrite$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 about page rewrite package: One discovery interview up to 45 minutes; one About page 600–1000 words, headline/CTA/meta; up to 3 revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization and one About page of 600–1,000 words.
- Pages, words and records
- One organization and one About page of 600–1,000 words.
- Formats
- DOCX/Google Doc with headline, CTA and metadata.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery interview.
- Client inputs
- Business history, audience, credentials, team facts and approved claims.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Three consolidated revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Site design/build, bios for multiple staff and photography separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingAbout Page Rewrite$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 about page rewrite package: One discovery interview up to 45 minutes; one About page 600–1000 words, headline/CTA/meta; up to 3 revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization and one About page of 600–1,000 words.
- Pages, words and records
- One organization and one About page of 600–1,000 words.
- Formats
- DOCX/Google Doc with headline, CTA and metadata.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute discovery interview.
- Client inputs
- Business history, audience, credentials, team facts and approved claims.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Three consolidated revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Site design/build, bios for multiple staff and photography separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Press Kit CopyContent & CopywritingIncluded scope and billingPress Kit Copy$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 press kit copy package: Long/short biography, fact sheet up to 2 pages, 5 one-line introductions and 3 story-angle pitches; up to 2500 total words and two consolidated revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One press kit; two bios, a fact sheet up to two pages, five introductions and three story angles; 2,500 words total.
- Pages, words and records
- One press kit; two bios, a fact sheet up to two pages, five introductions and three story angles; 2,500 words total.
- Formats
- Editable DOCX/Google Doc and PDF copy package.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute source interview.
- Client inputs
- Biographical facts, organization facts, newsworthiness evidence and approved source links.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions across the package.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Designed EPK/media kit, photographs, distribution and website build separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPress Kit Copy$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 press kit copy package: Long/short biography, fact sheet up to 2 pages, 5 one-line introductions and 3 story-angle pitches; up to 2500 total words and two consolidated revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One press kit; two bios, a fact sheet up to two pages, five introductions and three story angles; 2,500 words total.
- Pages, words and records
- One press kit; two bios, a fact sheet up to two pages, five introductions and three story angles; 2,500 words total.
- Formats
- Editable DOCX/Google Doc and PDF copy package.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute source interview.
- Client inputs
- Biographical facts, organization facts, newsworthiness evidence and approved source links.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions across the package.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Designed EPK/media kit, photographs, distribution and website build separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Long Form Thought Leadership PieceContent & CopywritingIncluded scope and billingLong Form Thought Leadership Piece$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 long form thought leadership piece package: One 2500–4000-word thought leadership piece, up to 10 documented sources, one 45-minute voice/source interview, up to 3 revisions; editable delivery and source list.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One author, one thesis, 2,500–4,000 words and up to ten documented sources.
- Pages, words and records
- One author, one thesis, 2,500–4,000 words and up to ten documented sources.
- Formats
- DOCX/Google Doc and source list.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute voice/source interview and one 30-minute outline review.
- Client inputs
- Approved thesis, author viewpoint, existing research, source access and voice sample.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Three consolidated revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- New primary study/data collection, peer review, book-length manuscripts and publishing separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLong Form Thought Leadership Piece$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 long form thought leadership piece package: One 2500–4000-word thought leadership piece, up to 10 documented sources, one 45-minute voice/source interview, up to 3 revisions; editable delivery and source list.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One author, one thesis, 2,500–4,000 words and up to ten documented sources.
- Pages, words and records
- One author, one thesis, 2,500–4,000 words and up to ten documented sources.
- Formats
- DOCX/Google Doc and source list.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute voice/source interview and one 30-minute outline review.
- Client inputs
- Approved thesis, author viewpoint, existing research, source access and voice sample.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Three consolidated revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- New primary study/data collection, peer review, book-length manuscripts and publishing separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Blog Content Pack (4 Posts per Month)Content & CopywritingIncluded scope and billingBlog Content Pack (4 Posts per Month)$3,800 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 blog content pack (4 posts per month) package: 4 researched posts/month, each 800–1500 words; one monthly editorial calendar, title/meta/header structure per post, up to 2 consolidated batch revisions and editable delivery.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Four articles per month, 800–1,500 words each, up to five sources per article and one editorial calendar.
- Pages, words and records
- Four articles per month, 800–1,500 words each, up to five sources per article and one editorial calendar.
- Formats
- Editable article files with titles, meta descriptions and heading structures.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute monthly editorial planning session.
- Client inputs
- Monthly themes, subject access, substantiated claims and brand-voice material.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Monthly. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated batch revisions per month; four article quantities preserved.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- CMS uploading, imagery, multiple interview subjects and social derivatives separate.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBlog Content Pack (4 Posts per Month)$3,800 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 blog content pack (4 posts per month) package: 4 researched posts/month, each 800–1500 words; one monthly editorial calendar, title/meta/header structure per post, up to 2 consolidated batch revisions and editable delivery.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Four articles per month, 800–1,500 words each, up to five sources per article and one editorial calendar.
- Pages, words and records
- Four articles per month, 800–1,500 words each, up to five sources per article and one editorial calendar.
- Formats
- Editable article files with titles, meta descriptions and heading structures.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute monthly editorial planning session.
- Client inputs
- Monthly themes, subject access, substantiated claims and brand-voice material.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Monthly. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated batch revisions per month; four article quantities preserved.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- CMS uploading, imagery, multiple interview subjects and social derivatives separate.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Full Website Copy (Up to 10 Pages)Content & CopywritingIncluded scope and billingFull Website Copy (Up to 10 Pages)$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 full website copy (up to 10 pages) package: Copy for up to ten named website pages, up to 6,000 total words, with SEO titles, metadata, headers and CTAs; two consolidated revision rounds per page.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Up to ten named pages; 6,000 total words.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to ten named pages; 6,000 total words.
- Formats
- Editable page-by-page copy with title, meta description, headings and CTA per page.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute structure review.
- Client inputs
- Approved sitemap of up to ten pages, service facts, audience, claims and existing brand voice.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revision rounds per page, preserving the published allowance.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Product catalogs, blog libraries, additional pages beyond the accepted ten-page scope and website implementation require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingFull Website Copy (Up to 10 Pages)$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 full website copy (up to 10 pages) package: Copy for up to ten named website pages, up to 6,000 total words, with SEO titles, metadata, headers and CTAs; two consolidated revision rounds per page.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Up to ten named pages; 6,000 total words.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to ten named pages; 6,000 total words.
- Formats
- Editable page-by-page copy with title, meta description, headings and CTA per page.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute structure review.
- Client inputs
- Approved sitemap of up to ten pages, service facts, audience, claims and existing brand voice.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revision rounds per page, preserving the published allowance.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Product catalogs, blog libraries, additional pages beyond the accepted ten-page scope and website implementation require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $8,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Full Website Copy (15-Page Base)Content & CopywritingIncluded scope and billingFull Website Copy (15-Page Base)$16,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 full website copy (15-page base) package: Copy for a finite new-order base of 15 named website pages, up to 10,000 total words, with SEO titles, metadata, headers and CTAs; two revision rounds and an editorial consistency pass. Additional pages require a written expansion quote.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- A defined 15-page base for new orders, 10,000 total words; expanded named inventories require a separate quote.
- Pages, words and records
- A defined 15-page base for new orders, 10,000 total words; expanded named inventories require a separate quote.
- Formats
- Editable page-by-page copy, SEO metadata and final consistency pass.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute discovery and two 45-minute outline/batch reviews.
- Client inputs
- Approved named page inventory, subject access, service/product facts and existing brand voice.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 5 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds on each submitted batch, up to three batches.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional pages beyond the 15-page base, product-description libraries, blog libraries and technical research studies require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingFull Website Copy (15-Page Base)$16,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 full website copy (15-page base) package: Copy for a finite new-order base of 15 named website pages, up to 10,000 total words, with SEO titles, metadata, headers and CTAs; two revision rounds and an editorial consistency pass. Additional pages require a written expansion quote.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- A defined 15-page base for new orders, 10,000 total words; expanded named inventories require a separate quote.
- Pages, words and records
- A defined 15-page base for new orders, 10,000 total words; expanded named inventories require a separate quote.
- Formats
- Editable page-by-page copy, SEO metadata and final consistency pass.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute discovery and two 45-minute outline/batch reviews.
- Client inputs
- Approved named page inventory, subject access, service/product facts and existing brand voice.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 5 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds on each submitted batch, up to three batches.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional pages beyond the 15-page base, product-description libraries, blog libraries and technical research studies require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $16,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Streaming Distribution SetupMusic MarketingIncluded scope and billingStreaming Distribution Setup$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 streaming distribution setup package: One client-owned distributor account and one release up to 15 tracks; metadata/ISRC review, approved credits/artwork, submission to the distributor-supported DSPs expressly named in the accepted order, and status handover.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One artist, one client-owned distributor account and one release up to 15 tracks.
- Pages, words and records
- One artist, one client-owned distributor account and one release up to 15 tracks.
- Formats
- Approved metadata/ISRC spreadsheet, submission/status log and account handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute release intake and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Mastered WAVs, artwork, ownership/split approvals, release date and distributor account/payment method.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated metadata correction before submission and one distributor correction cycle.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Distributor/license/takedown/royalty costs paid separately; accounts remain client-owned; no platform acceptance/date guarantee.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingStreaming Distribution Setup$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 streaming distribution setup package: One client-owned distributor account and one release up to 15 tracks; metadata/ISRC review, approved credits/artwork, submission to the distributor-supported DSPs expressly named in the accepted order, and status handover.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One artist, one client-owned distributor account and one release up to 15 tracks.
- Pages, words and records
- One artist, one client-owned distributor account and one release up to 15 tracks.
- Formats
- Approved metadata/ISRC spreadsheet, submission/status log and account handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute release intake and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Mastered WAVs, artwork, ownership/split approvals, release date and distributor account/payment method.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated metadata correction before submission and one distributor correction cycle.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Distributor/license/takedown/royalty costs paid separately; accounts remain client-owned; no platform acceptance/date guarantee.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Spotify Canvas PackMusic MarketingIncluded scope and billingSpotify Canvas Pack$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 spotify canvas pack package: 5 distinct Spotify Canvas loops for one release, each within current platform specification; one agreed visual system, supplied/licensed media, exports and upload assistance for 5 tracks; two batch revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One release and five distinct Canvas loops, one agreed visual treatment.
- Pages, words and records
- One release and five distinct Canvas loops, one agreed visual treatment.
- Formats
- Five platform-compliant vertical video exports and upload/status log for five tracks.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute visual briefing and one 30-minute batch review.
- Client inputs
- Track access, approved visual direction and supplied or separately licensed footage/images.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated batch revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- New filming/long-form videos and artist account recovery separate; submission depends on feature/account availability.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSpotify Canvas Pack$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 spotify canvas pack package: 5 distinct Spotify Canvas loops for one release, each within current platform specification; one agreed visual system, supplied/licensed media, exports and upload assistance for 5 tracks; two batch revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One release and five distinct Canvas loops, one agreed visual treatment.
- Pages, words and records
- One release and five distinct Canvas loops, one agreed visual treatment.
- Formats
- Five platform-compliant vertical video exports and upload/status log for five tracks.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute visual briefing and one 30-minute batch review.
- Client inputs
- Track access, approved visual direction and supplied or separately licensed footage/images.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated batch revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- New filming/long-form videos and artist account recovery separate; submission depends on feature/account availability.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Spotify / Apple Music Editorial PitchMusic MarketingIncluded scope and billingSpotify / Apple Music Editorial Pitch$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 spotify / apple music editorial pitch package: One release editorial-pitch packet: genre/mood metadata review, pitch copy and Spotify for Artists submission where eligible; Apple Music editorial/distributor route checked and used only if actually available; client submission/status log.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One release; Spotify editorial submission plus the Apple/distributor editorial route only if available to the account.
- Pages, words and records
- One release; Spotify editorial submission plus the Apple/distributor editorial route only if available to the account.
- Formats
- Pitch copy, genre/mood metadata and submission/availability log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute release briefing and one 20-minute pitch review.
- Client inputs
- Unreleased delivery status, authorized artist access, release facts and at least four weeks lead time.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 weeks (must start 4+ weeks before release). Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated copy revisions before submission; no guaranteed placement.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Editorial playlist acceptance is not guaranteed. Apple Music submission is included only through a route actually available to the artist/distributor account; account eligibility is confirmed before acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSpotify / Apple Music Editorial Pitch$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 spotify / apple music editorial pitch package: One release editorial-pitch packet: genre/mood metadata review, pitch copy and Spotify for Artists submission where eligible; Apple Music editorial/distributor route checked and used only if actually available; client submission/status log.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One release; Spotify editorial submission plus the Apple/distributor editorial route only if available to the account.
- Pages, words and records
- One release; Spotify editorial submission plus the Apple/distributor editorial route only if available to the account.
- Formats
- Pitch copy, genre/mood metadata and submission/availability log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute release briefing and one 20-minute pitch review.
- Client inputs
- Unreleased delivery status, authorized artist access, release facts and at least four weeks lead time.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 weeks (must start 4+ weeks before release). Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated copy revisions before submission; no guaranteed placement.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Editorial playlist acceptance is not guaranteed. Apple Music submission is included only through a route actually available to the artist/distributor account; account eligibility is confirmed before acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Lyric VideoMusic MarketingIncluded scope and billingLyric Video$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 lyric video package: One lyric video for one supplied mastered track up to 6 minutes; approved exact lyrics, one visual treatment, synchronized lyrics, 1080p master and YouTube upload/metadata; two revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One mastered track up to six minutes, one approved lyric transcript and one visual treatment.
- Pages, words and records
- One mastered track up to six minutes, one approved lyric transcript and one visual treatment.
- Formats
- 1920×1080 H.264 MP4, thumbnail and one YouTube upload with metadata.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute creative briefing and one 30-minute edit review.
- Client inputs
- Mastered audio, exact approved lyrics, cleared images/footage and authorized channel access.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions; replaced lyrics/audio after approval require change scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Original filming, extensive character animation, translation/transcription and music rights separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLyric Video$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 lyric video package: One lyric video for one supplied mastered track up to 6 minutes; approved exact lyrics, one visual treatment, synchronized lyrics, 1080p master and YouTube upload/metadata; two revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One mastered track up to six minutes, one approved lyric transcript and one visual treatment.
- Pages, words and records
- One mastered track up to six minutes, one approved lyric transcript and one visual treatment.
- Formats
- 1920×1080 H.264 MP4, thumbnail and one YouTube upload with metadata.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute creative briefing and one 30-minute edit review.
- Client inputs
- Mastered audio, exact approved lyrics, cleared images/footage and authorized channel access.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions; replaced lyrics/audio after approval require change scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Original filming, extensive character animation, translation/transcription and music rights separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Electronic Press Kit (EPK)Music MarketingIncluded scope and billingElectronic Press Kit (EPK)$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 electronic press kit (epk) package: One artist EPK in PDF and web-ready form: long/short bio, up to 8 supplied photos, up to 6 music/video links, press quote/contact sections; PDF up to 8 pages and content/layout for one existing web page, downloadable zip; two revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act; two bios, eight supplied photos, six music/video links and one press/contact section; PDF up to eight pages.
- Pages, words and records
- One act; two bios, eight supplied photos, six music/video links and one press/contact section; PDF up to eight pages.
- Formats
- PDF, one existing-page web layout, JPEG selects and asset ZIP.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute intake and one 30-minute kit review.
- Client inputs
- Approved bios, photos/permissions, performance links, press quotes and web access.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated kit revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- New site hosting/build, photoshoot, fact/license verification beyond supplied records and outreach separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingElectronic Press Kit (EPK)$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 electronic press kit (epk) package: One artist EPK in PDF and web-ready form: long/short bio, up to 8 supplied photos, up to 6 music/video links, press quote/contact sections; PDF up to 8 pages and content/layout for one existing web page, downloadable zip; two revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act; two bios, eight supplied photos, six music/video links and one press/contact section; PDF up to eight pages.
- Pages, words and records
- One act; two bios, eight supplied photos, six music/video links and one press/contact section; PDF up to eight pages.
- Formats
- PDF, one existing-page web layout, JPEG selects and asset ZIP.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute intake and one 30-minute kit review.
- Client inputs
- Approved bios, photos/permissions, performance links, press quotes and web access.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated kit revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- New site hosting/build, photoshoot, fact/license verification beyond supplied records and outreach separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Working Band OngoingMusic MarketingIncluded scope and billingWorking Band Ongoing$3,000 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 working band ongoing package: Up to 2 show campaigns/month, each compact show kit (one master tile adapted square/portrait plus caption/ticket link/event record update); 8 original social units over 2 named platforms, including show tiles; one newsletter 300–600 words and monthly activity summary. Social format allocation: The 8-original social pool contains 8 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 16 image exports total (8 primary and 8 derivative files), with captions and up to 16 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act; two compact show campaigns, eight original feed units across two accounts (16 placements), one newsletter and one report monthly.
- Pages, words and records
- One act; two compact show campaigns, eight original feed units across two accounts (16 placements), one newsletter and one report monthly.
- Formats
- Square/portrait JPG/PNG, captions, two event records, native newsletter and PDF report. Static social allocation: 8 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 8 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly planning/review.
- Client inputs
- Show dates/ticket links, licensed show imagery, monthly news and consented mailing list access.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Monthly. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revision rounds across the month’s two submitted content batches. Show assets count within the stated original-content pool and are not charged again. A replacement concept or additional deliverable requires a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Show assets count within 8-unit pool. Separate full per-show package, venue outreach, filming and paid spend not included.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingWorking Band Ongoing$3,000 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 working band ongoing package: Up to 2 show campaigns/month, each compact show kit (one master tile adapted square/portrait plus caption/ticket link/event record update); 8 original social units over 2 named platforms, including show tiles; one newsletter 300–600 words and monthly activity summary. Social format allocation: The 8-original social pool contains 8 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 16 image exports total (8 primary and 8 derivative files), with captions and up to 16 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act; two compact show campaigns, eight original feed units across two accounts (16 placements), one newsletter and one report monthly.
- Pages, words and records
- One act; two compact show campaigns, eight original feed units across two accounts (16 placements), one newsletter and one report monthly.
- Formats
- Square/portrait JPG/PNG, captions, two event records, native newsletter and PDF report. Static social allocation: 8 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 8 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly planning/review.
- Client inputs
- Show dates/ticket links, licensed show imagery, monthly news and consented mailing list access.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Monthly. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revision rounds across the month’s two submitted content batches. Show assets count within the stated original-content pool and are not charged again. A replacement concept or additional deliverable requires a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Show assets count within 8-unit pool. Separate full per-show package, venue outreach, filming and paid spend not included.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Single Release CampaignMusic MarketingIncluded scope and billingSingle Release Campaign$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 single release campaign package: One mastered single; one distributor submission, one cover design OR supplied-cover check, one presave setup, 4-week social rollout of 8 original feed units shared/adapted over 2 named platforms (16 placements maximum), including one release-day unit; tracking/report handover. Social format allocation: The 8-original social pool contains 8 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 16 image exports total (8 primary and 8 derivative files), with captions and up to 16 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One single; one distribution submission, cover design/check, presave and eight original social units over two accounts (16 placements) across four rollout weeks.
- Pages, words and records
- One single; one distribution submission, cover design/check, presave and eight original social units over two accounts (16 placements) across four rollout weeks.
- Formats
- Distribution log, cover JPEG, presave link, social JPG/PNG/captions and campaign report. Static social allocation: 8 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 8 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute kickoff and two 30-minute campaign reviews.
- Client inputs
- Mastered single, rights/splits, release date, authorized distributor/social access and approved artist material.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 6 weeks, ending on release day. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated art/copy rounds and one pre-submission metadata correction.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Client supplies the cleared master and approved credits. Distributor subscription and licensing charges, ad spend, photography, video production, venue booking and radio servicing are separate. The included distribution setup/submission service is part of this package and is not charged again.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSingle Release Campaign$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 single release campaign package: One mastered single; one distributor submission, one cover design OR supplied-cover check, one presave setup, 4-week social rollout of 8 original feed units shared/adapted over 2 named platforms (16 placements maximum), including one release-day unit; tracking/report handover. Social format allocation: The 8-original social pool contains 8 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 16 image exports total (8 primary and 8 derivative files), with captions and up to 16 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One single; one distribution submission, cover design/check, presave and eight original social units over two accounts (16 placements) across four rollout weeks.
- Pages, words and records
- One single; one distribution submission, cover design/check, presave and eight original social units over two accounts (16 placements) across four rollout weeks.
- Formats
- Distribution log, cover JPEG, presave link, social JPG/PNG/captions and campaign report. Static social allocation: 8 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 8 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute kickoff and two 30-minute campaign reviews.
- Client inputs
- Mastered single, rights/splits, release date, authorized distributor/social access and approved artist material.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 6 weeks, ending on release day. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated art/copy rounds and one pre-submission metadata correction.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Client supplies the cleared master and approved credits. Distributor subscription and licensing charges, ad spend, photography, video production, venue booking and radio servicing are separate. The included distribution setup/submission service is part of this package and is not charged again.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Album ArtworkMusic MarketingIncluded scope and billingAlbum Artwork$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 album artwork package: One approved cover concept and up to three supporting panels (back, inside, disc); DSP square plus one vinyl and one CD vendor template, two revisions and production-ready outputs.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One cover concept and up to three supporting panels; one vinyl vendor template and one CD vendor template plus DSP square.
- Pages, words and records
- One cover concept and up to three supporting panels; one vinyl vendor template and one CD vendor template plus DSP square.
- Formats
- Print-ready PDF/vector output to supplied templates and digital cover JPEG.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute art briefing and one 30-minute proof review.
- Client inputs
- Title/credits, supplied vendor dielines, licensed images and label/distributor specifications.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions before final vendor proof.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Printing/manufacture, supplied-photo licensing, original photoshoot and additional packaging formats separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingAlbum Artwork$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 album artwork package: One approved cover concept and up to three supporting panels (back, inside, disc); DSP square plus one vinyl and one CD vendor template, two revisions and production-ready outputs.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One cover concept and up to three supporting panels; one vinyl vendor template and one CD vendor template plus DSP square.
- Pages, words and records
- One cover concept and up to three supporting panels; one vinyl vendor template and one CD vendor template plus DSP square.
- Formats
- Print-ready PDF/vector output to supplied templates and digital cover JPEG.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute art briefing and one 30-minute proof review.
- Client inputs
- Title/credits, supplied vendor dielines, licensed images and label/distributor specifications.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions before final vendor proof.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Printing/manufacture, supplied-photo licensing, original photoshoot and additional packaging formats separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Touring Artist RetainerMusic MarketingIncluded scope and billingTouring Artist Retainer$4,700 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 1 touring artist retainer package: Four compact per-show campaigns each month: one master tile adapted square/portrait with caption/ticket link and event update per show; 12 original social units total over two named platforms (24 placements), including the four show tiles; one 300–600-word newsletter, four merchandise coordination requests and one 30-minute monthly check-in/report. Social format allocation: The 12-original social pool contains 12 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 24 image exports total (12 primary and 12 derivative files), with captions and up to 24 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act; four compact show campaigns, 12 original feed units over two accounts (24 placements), one newsletter and four merch coordination requests monthly.
- Pages, words and records
- One act; four compact show campaigns, 12 original feed units over two accounts (24 placements), one newsletter and four merch coordination requests monthly.
- Formats
- Show tiles/captions, four event records, native newsletter, merch decision log and monthly report. Static social allocation: 12 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 12 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly check-in.
- Client inputs
- Tour dates, ticket/merch links, licensed assets, production contacts and consented mailing list.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Monthly, 6-month minimum. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revision rounds across the month’s two submitted content batches. Show assets count within the stated original-content pool and are not charged again. A replacement concept or additional deliverable requires a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- The four compact show kits are defined in this scope and their social units count within the 12-original monthly pool. Full standalone event kits, original photo/video shoots and performance staffing are separate unless an existing signed agreement includes them.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingTouring Artist Retainer$4,700 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 1 touring artist retainer package: Four compact per-show campaigns each month: one master tile adapted square/portrait with caption/ticket link and event update per show; 12 original social units total over two named platforms (24 placements), including the four show tiles; one 300–600-word newsletter, four merchandise coordination requests and one 30-minute monthly check-in/report. Social format allocation: The 12-original social pool contains 12 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 24 image exports total (12 primary and 12 derivative files), with captions and up to 24 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act; four compact show campaigns, 12 original feed units over two accounts (24 placements), one newsletter and four merch coordination requests monthly.
- Pages, words and records
- One act; four compact show campaigns, 12 original feed units over two accounts (24 placements), one newsletter and four merch coordination requests monthly.
- Formats
- Show tiles/captions, four event records, native newsletter, merch decision log and monthly report. Static social allocation: 12 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 12 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly check-in.
- Client inputs
- Tour dates, ticket/merch links, licensed assets, production contacts and consented mailing list.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Monthly, 6-month minimum. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revision rounds across the month’s two submitted content batches. Show assets count within the stated original-content pool and are not charged again. A replacement concept or additional deliverable requires a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- The four compact show kits are defined in this scope and their social units count within the 12-original monthly pool. Full standalone event kits, original photo/video shoots and performance staffing are separate unless an existing signed agreement includes them.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $4,700 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
EP Release CampaignMusic MarketingIncluded scope and billingEP Release Campaign$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 ep release campaign package: One EP up to six tracks, distributor submission, two prerelease single pushes, cover art, presave and one campaign landing-page update, and one existing EPK update; 16 original social units over two platforms (32 placements), including release-day messaging; report/handover. Social format allocation: The 16-original social pool contains 16 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 32 image exports total (16 primary and 16 derivative files), with captions and up to 32 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One EP up to six tracks; two single pushes; 16 original social units over two accounts (32 placements), one landing page and one existing EPK update.
- Pages, words and records
- One EP up to six tracks; two single pushes; 16 original social units over two accounts (32 placements), one landing page and one existing EPK update.
- Formats
- Distribution log, cover JPEG, presave link, landing/EPK files, social assets and report. Static social allocation: 16 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 16 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute kickoff and three 30-minute milestone reviews.
- Client inputs
- Mastered tracks, rights/credits, artwork brief, release calendar, existing EPK and authorized accounts.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated art/copy rounds; one metadata correction before submission.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- New standalone website/EPK rebuild, filming, DSP/license/ad spend and outreach beyond named scope separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingEP Release Campaign$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 ep release campaign package: One EP up to six tracks, distributor submission, two prerelease single pushes, cover art, presave and one campaign landing-page update, and one existing EPK update; 16 original social units over two platforms (32 placements), including release-day messaging; report/handover. Social format allocation: The 16-original social pool contains 16 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 32 image exports total (16 primary and 16 derivative files), with captions and up to 32 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One EP up to six tracks; two single pushes; 16 original social units over two accounts (32 placements), one landing page and one existing EPK update.
- Pages, words and records
- One EP up to six tracks; two single pushes; 16 original social units over two accounts (32 placements), one landing page and one existing EPK update.
- Formats
- Distribution log, cover JPEG, presave link, landing/EPK files, social assets and report. Static social allocation: 16 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 16 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute kickoff and three 30-minute milestone reviews.
- Client inputs
- Mastered tracks, rights/credits, artwork brief, release calendar, existing EPK and authorized accounts.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated art/copy rounds; one metadata correction before submission.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- New standalone website/EPK rebuild, filming, DSP/license/ad spend and outreach beyond named scope separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $8,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Music Video, Single CameraMusic MarketingIncluded scope and billingMusic Video, Single Camera$11,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 music video, single camera package: One single-camera music video for one track up to 6 minutes: one agreed concept/shot list, half-day shoot up to 240 minutes at one location, edit/color/titles and two revisions; 1080p master plus one vertical promo excerpt up to 30 seconds.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One track up to six minutes; one location; one single-camera shoot up to 240 minutes and one 30-second promo excerpt.
- Pages, words and records
- One track up to six minutes; one location; one single-camera shoot up to 240 minutes and one 30-second promo excerpt.
- Formats
- 1920×1080 H.264 master, 1080×1920 promo excerpt and caption file for speech if present.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute concept/shot-list meeting and one 45-minute edit review; shoot window is separate.
- Client inputs
- Mastered track, approved treatment, performer/access permissions and location availability.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 6 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions, preserving the published allowance.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Travel, location/crew/cast/equipment rental, permits and music rights quoted separately; no unbounded generative video production.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMusic Video, Single Camera$11,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 music video, single camera package: One single-camera music video for one track up to 6 minutes: one agreed concept/shot list, half-day shoot up to 240 minutes at one location, edit/color/titles and two revisions; 1080p master plus one vertical promo excerpt up to 30 seconds.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One track up to six minutes; one location; one single-camera shoot up to 240 minutes and one 30-second promo excerpt.
- Pages, words and records
- One track up to six minutes; one location; one single-camera shoot up to 240 minutes and one 30-second promo excerpt.
- Formats
- 1920×1080 H.264 master, 1080×1920 promo excerpt and caption file for speech if present.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute concept/shot-list meeting and one 45-minute edit review; shoot window is separate.
- Client inputs
- Mastered track, approved treatment, performer/access permissions and location availability.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 6 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions, preserving the published allowance.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Travel, location/crew/cast/equipment rental, permits and music rights quoted separately; no unbounded generative video production.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $11,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Album Release CampaignMusic MarketingIncluded scope and billingAlbum Release Campaign$13,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 album release campaign package: One album up to 15 tracks with distributor submission and three single pushes; cover plus three supporting art panels; presave, one campaign landing-page update and one existing EPK update; 24 originals over two platforms (48 placements); 20 press contacts with one follow-up each and final report. Social format allocation: The 24-original social pool contains 24 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 48 image exports total (24 primary and 24 derivative files), with captions and up to 48 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One album up to 15 tracks; three single pushes; 24 original social units over two accounts (48 placements), 20 press targets and one follow-up each.
- Pages, words and records
- One album up to 15 tracks; three single pushes; 24 original social units over two accounts (48 placements), 20 press targets and one follow-up each.
- Formats
- Cover plus three panels, distribution log, presave/landing/EPK update, social files and press/report ledger. Static social allocation: 24 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 24 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute kickoff and four 30-minute milestone reviews.
- Client inputs
- Mastered album, credits/rights, release schedule, existing EPK and authorized platforms.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 10 to 12 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated art/copy rounds and one pre-submission metadata correction.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Separate website rebuild, filming, physical manufacture, licensing/distribution/media fees; no editorial-placement guarantee.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingAlbum Release Campaign$13,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 album release campaign package: One album up to 15 tracks with distributor submission and three single pushes; cover plus three supporting art panels; presave, one campaign landing-page update and one existing EPK update; 24 originals over two platforms (48 placements); 20 press contacts with one follow-up each and final report. Social format allocation: The 24-original social pool contains 24 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 48 image exports total (24 primary and 24 derivative files), with captions and up to 48 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One album up to 15 tracks; three single pushes; 24 original social units over two accounts (48 placements), 20 press targets and one follow-up each.
- Pages, words and records
- One album up to 15 tracks; three single pushes; 24 original social units over two accounts (48 placements), 20 press targets and one follow-up each.
- Formats
- Cover plus three panels, distribution log, presave/landing/EPK update, social files and press/report ledger. Static social allocation: 24 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 24 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute kickoff and four 30-minute milestone reviews.
- Client inputs
- Mastered album, credits/rights, release schedule, existing EPK and authorized platforms.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 10 to 12 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated art/copy rounds and one pre-submission metadata correction.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Separate website rebuild, filming, physical manufacture, licensing/distribution/media fees; no editorial-placement guarantee.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $13,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Cover Song Mechanical LicenseMusic LicensingIncluded scope and billingCover Song Mechanical License$750 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 cover song mechanical license package: Administrative service for one cover-song mechanical license: identify work, request quote/application, client approval, acquisition assistance and document delivery.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One cover song and one defined release/use application through one suitable licensing service.
- Pages, words and records
- One cover song and one defined release/use application through one suitable licensing service.
- Formats
- Quote/application status, approved acquisition record and license documentation if granted.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute rights/use intake.
- Client inputs
- Song/composer identification, intended units/uses/territories and client payment authorization to licensing provider.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One factual correction cycle before submission; expanded uses require a revised provider quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Actual license/royalty fees and legal counsel separate; no sync/public-performance/master-rights grant implied.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingCover Song Mechanical License$750 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 cover song mechanical license package: Administrative service for one cover-song mechanical license: identify work, request quote/application, client approval, acquisition assistance and document delivery.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One cover song and one defined release/use application through one suitable licensing service.
- Pages, words and records
- One cover song and one defined release/use application through one suitable licensing service.
- Formats
- Quote/application status, approved acquisition record and license documentation if granted.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute rights/use intake.
- Client inputs
- Song/composer identification, intended units/uses/territories and client payment authorization to licensing provider.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One factual correction cycle before submission; expanded uses require a revised provider quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Actual license/royalty fees and legal counsel separate; no sync/public-performance/master-rights grant implied.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $750 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
BMI / ASCAP / SESAC RegistrationMusic LicensingIncluded scope and billingBMI / ASCAP / SESAC Registration$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 bmi / ascap / sesac registration package: One client songwriter/publisher account at one selected PRO; membership assistance and register up to 10 works from client-approved splits/credits; documentation/handover.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One songwriter/publisher, one selected PRO account and ten works with client-approved splits.
- Pages, words and records
- One songwriter/publisher, one selected PRO account and ten works with client-approved splits.
- Formats
- Registration worksheet, submission confirmations and ownership/access handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Identity, contributor identifiers, correct titles/splits, existing affiliations and supporting authority.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated factual correction cycle before submission and one provider query response.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Membership/PRO fees and legal resolution of ownership splits separate; do not promise SESAC invitation acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBMI / ASCAP / SESAC Registration$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 bmi / ascap / sesac registration package: One client songwriter/publisher account at one selected PRO; membership assistance and register up to 10 works from client-approved splits/credits; documentation/handover.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One songwriter/publisher, one selected PRO account and ten works with client-approved splits.
- Pages, words and records
- One songwriter/publisher, one selected PRO account and ten works with client-approved splits.
- Formats
- Registration worksheet, submission confirmations and ownership/access handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Identity, contributor identifiers, correct titles/splits, existing affiliations and supporting authority.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated factual correction cycle before submission and one provider query response.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Membership/PRO fees and legal resolution of ownership splits separate; do not promise SESAC invitation acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Sync Licensing Prep (per Track)Music LicensingIncluded scope and billingSync Licensing Prep (per Track)$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 sync licensing prep (per track) package: One cleared track: metadata/keywords, review provided instrumental/stems, prepare deliverables without remixing, register with one accepted library and approach 3 suitable initial contacts; licensing-status log.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One cleared track, one supplied instrumental, up to 20 supplied stems, one library application and three initial contacts.
- Pages, words and records
- One cleared track, one supplied instrumental, up to 20 supplied stems, one library application and three initial contacts.
- Formats
- Organized audio delivery ZIP, metadata/keyword sheet and submission/status log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute rights/material briefing and one 20-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Master/instrumental/stems, rights/splits, contact approvals and intended licensing uses.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated metadata/file correction; no remixing or new instrumental recording.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Mix/recording/stem separation, library fees, commissions and licensing/legal negotiation separate; placement not guaranteed.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSync Licensing Prep (per Track)$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 sync licensing prep (per track) package: One cleared track: metadata/keywords, review provided instrumental/stems, prepare deliverables without remixing, register with one accepted library and approach 3 suitable initial contacts; licensing-status log.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One cleared track, one supplied instrumental, up to 20 supplied stems, one library application and three initial contacts.
- Pages, words and records
- One cleared track, one supplied instrumental, up to 20 supplied stems, one library application and three initial contacts.
- Formats
- Organized audio delivery ZIP, metadata/keyword sheet and submission/status log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute rights/material briefing and one 20-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Master/instrumental/stems, rights/splits, contact approvals and intended licensing uses.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated metadata/file correction; no remixing or new instrumental recording.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Mix/recording/stem separation, library fees, commissions and licensing/legal negotiation separate; placement not guaranteed.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Eventbrite / Ticketing SetupEvent SupportIncluded scope and billingEventbrite / Ticketing Setup$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 eventbrite / ticketing setup package: One event on one chosen ticketing platform, up to 5 ticket types, one branded page, sales dates/limits and client-approved prices, confirmation copy and one existing-website embed/link; test and handover.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event, one ticketing account, five ticket types and one existing-site embed/link.
- Pages, words and records
- One event, one ticketing account, five ticket types and one existing-site embed/link.
- Formats
- Branded native event page, price/availability matrix and six test-case results without purchases.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Event facts, client-approved ticket prices/tax/refund terms, venue capacity and account-owner access.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated configuration/copy revisions before sale; changed event rules require a change scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ticket/merchant fees, refunds, check-in staffing, custom checkout and multiple events excluded; client owns account.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingEventbrite / Ticketing Setup$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 eventbrite / ticketing setup package: One event on one chosen ticketing platform, up to 5 ticket types, one branded page, sales dates/limits and client-approved prices, confirmation copy and one existing-website embed/link; test and handover.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event, one ticketing account, five ticket types and one existing-site embed/link.
- Pages, words and records
- One event, one ticketing account, five ticket types and one existing-site embed/link.
- Formats
- Branded native event page, price/availability matrix and six test-case results without purchases.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Event facts, client-approved ticket prices/tax/refund terms, venue capacity and account-owner access.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated configuration/copy revisions before sale; changed event rules require a change scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ticket/merchant fees, refunds, check-in staffing, custom checkout and multiple events excluded; client owns account.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Tour AnnouncementEvent SupportIncluded scope and billingTour Announcement$1,900 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 tour announcement package: One tour up to 15 confirmed stops; tour poster, one social tile in square/portrait, one schedule graphic and one 400–700-word press release; two revisions and delivery matrix.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One tour with 15 confirmed stops, one poster, one square/portrait tile, one schedule graphic and one 400–700-word release.
- Pages, words and records
- One tour with 15 confirmed stops, one poster, one square/portrait tile, one schedule graphic and one 400–700-word release.
- Formats
- Print PDF, JPG/PNG social/schedule assets and DOCX/PDF release.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute route/creative briefing and one 30-minute review.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed itinerary, ticket links, artist assets/permissions and press contact.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions across the announcement package.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Booking, routing, press distribution and continuing date revisions excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingTour Announcement$1,900 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 tour announcement package: One tour up to 15 confirmed stops; tour poster, one social tile in square/portrait, one schedule graphic and one 400–700-word press release; two revisions and delivery matrix.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One tour with 15 confirmed stops, one poster, one square/portrait tile, one schedule graphic and one 400–700-word release.
- Pages, words and records
- One tour with 15 confirmed stops, one poster, one square/portrait tile, one schedule graphic and one 400–700-word release.
- Formats
- Print PDF, JPG/PNG social/schedule assets and DOCX/PDF release.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute route/creative briefing and one 30-minute review.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed itinerary, ticket links, artist assets/permissions and press contact.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions across the announcement package.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Booking, routing, press distribution and continuing date revisions excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,900 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Single Event Campaign, Core AssetsEvent SupportIncluded scope and billingSingle Event Campaign, Core Assets$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 single event campaign, core assets package: One event: one poster master with print/web export, 3 original social square assets with captions/CTA and one calendar-listing copy; two batch revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event, one poster master, three distinct original square social messages and one listing.
- Pages, words and records
- One event, one poster master, three distinct original square social messages and one listing.
- Formats
- Print/web poster, three 1080×1080 JPG/PNG assets with captions/CTA, and listing text up to 300 words.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute batch review.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed date/venue, ticket link, approved copy, licensed imagery and production deadline.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated batch revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Posting/submissions, reel, print costs, filming and paid media separate unless explicitly named.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSingle Event Campaign, Core Assets$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 single event campaign, core assets package: One event: one poster master with print/web export, 3 original social square assets with captions/CTA and one calendar-listing copy; two batch revisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event, one poster master, three distinct original square social messages and one listing.
- Pages, words and records
- One event, one poster master, three distinct original square social messages and one listing.
- Formats
- Print/web poster, three 1080×1080 JPG/PNG assets with captions/CTA, and listing text up to 300 words.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute batch review.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed date/venue, ticket link, approved copy, licensed imagery and production deadline.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated batch revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Posting/submissions, reel, print costs, filming and paid media separate unless explicitly named.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Show Schedule DocumentEvent SupportIncluded scope and billingShow Schedule Document$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 show schedule: One running order for one event, with up to 60 timed cues, segment durations, responsible crew, contact roles and contingency notes.
- 1 crew briefing copy: A print PDF plus editable spreadsheet; one cue-numbered working copy and one final issue with version/date.
- 1 contingency matrix: Up to 10 decision points covering late starts, missing contributors and technical interruptions.
- 1 cue sheet: Separate condensed operator cue sheet extracted from the running order, up to 60 cues.
- 1 crew assignment matrix: Up to 12 crew roles mapped to responsibilities, client-provided work contacts and relevant cue numbers; separate editable worksheet and PDF.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event at one venue; up to 12 crew roles.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to 60 cues and 10 contingency entries; up to 12 printed pages.
- Formats
- PDF and XLSX or client-owned Google Sheet; A4 or US Letter.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute production intake and one 45-minute schedule walkthrough.
- Client inputs
- Event date, draft program, stage/technical plans, named crew, access windows and confirmed contributors.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; preserves the current two-week production allowance.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for show schedule document.
- Review show schedule and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Live stage management, equipment operation and onsite crew coverage are outside this document scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingShow Schedule Document$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 show schedule: One running order for one event, with up to 60 timed cues, segment durations, responsible crew, contact roles and contingency notes.
- 1 crew briefing copy: A print PDF plus editable spreadsheet; one cue-numbered working copy and one final issue with version/date.
- 1 contingency matrix: Up to 10 decision points covering late starts, missing contributors and technical interruptions.
- 1 cue sheet: Separate condensed operator cue sheet extracted from the running order, up to 60 cues.
- 1 crew assignment matrix: Up to 12 crew roles mapped to responsibilities, client-provided work contacts and relevant cue numbers; separate editable worksheet and PDF.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event at one venue; up to 12 crew roles.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to 60 cues and 10 contingency entries; up to 12 printed pages.
- Formats
- PDF and XLSX or client-owned Google Sheet; A4 or US Letter.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute production intake and one 45-minute schedule walkthrough.
- Client inputs
- Event date, draft program, stage/technical plans, named crew, access windows and confirmed contributors.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; preserves the current two-week production allowance.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for show schedule document.
- Review show schedule and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Live stage management, equipment operation and onsite crew coverage are outside this document scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Full per Show Campaign — One EventEvent SupportIncluded scope and billingFull per Show Campaign — One Event$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 event visual system: One event key visual with type, color and image treatment.
- 1 print poster: One layout at 11×17 inches and one press PDF; one 18×24-inch adaptation.
- 4 original social concepts: Four distinct event messages derived from one shared key visual, each with caption up to 150 words and CTA; square/portrait adaptations produce eight image exports. These are proposed message concepts, not four independent visual-identity commissions.
- 4 story frames: Four individual 1080×1920 frames; these are not four multi-frame sequences.
- 1 event listing copy: One description up to 300 words, one short listing up to 80 words and one ticket-link tracking plan.
- 1 email announcement: One email up to 400 words with subject, preheader and CTA; one test proof.
- 2 additional print layouts: One handbill at 5.5×8.5 inches and one flyer at US Letter; press PDFs.
- 7 header and metadata adaptations: One each: web hero 1920×1080, Facebook event header 1920×1005, Eventbrite header 2160×1080, X header 1500×500, Open Graph 1200×630, email header 1200×400, and YouTube thumbnail 1280×720; verify live platform specifications before production.
- 3 additional social adaptations: One reel cover 1080×1920, one X post 1600×900 and one LinkedIn square 1080×1080 derived from approved creative.
- 1 vertical motion reel: One 15–30-second motion edit from supplied imagery;1080×1920 MP4 adapted for TikTok and YouTube Shorts, captions where speech used; original filming excluded.
- 1 press release: One release up to 600 words in DOCX/PDF with approved event facts.
- 1 media advisory: One advisory up to 300 words in DOCX/PDF; distribution not included unless explicitly scoped.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event, one venue, one organizer, up to two social accounts and one client email platform; up to eight social publishing placements if access is provided.
- Pages, words and records
- One event; four original social concepts and their listed adaptations; release 600 words, advisory 300, listing 300, shortlisting 80, email 400; four captions 150 words each.
- Formats
- Press PDFs for poster/handbill/flyer; JPG/PNG platform sizes listed in deliverables; vertical H.264 MP4; DOCX/PDF press copy; final platform specifications checked before export.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute approval review.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed event/venue/date/time, ticket URL, performer names, licensed artwork, brand assets and one release approver.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15–20 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, preserving the current three-to-four-week allowance.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for full per show campaign — one event.
- Review event visual system and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Original onsite filming, full-length video, complex animation, extra edits beyond the specified supplied-media motion reel, physical printing and media distribution require a separately accepted quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingFull per Show Campaign — One Event$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 event visual system: One event key visual with type, color and image treatment.
- 1 print poster: One layout at 11×17 inches and one press PDF; one 18×24-inch adaptation.
- 4 original social concepts: Four distinct event messages derived from one shared key visual, each with caption up to 150 words and CTA; square/portrait adaptations produce eight image exports. These are proposed message concepts, not four independent visual-identity commissions.
- 4 story frames: Four individual 1080×1920 frames; these are not four multi-frame sequences.
- 1 event listing copy: One description up to 300 words, one short listing up to 80 words and one ticket-link tracking plan.
- 1 email announcement: One email up to 400 words with subject, preheader and CTA; one test proof.
- 2 additional print layouts: One handbill at 5.5×8.5 inches and one flyer at US Letter; press PDFs.
- 7 header and metadata adaptations: One each: web hero 1920×1080, Facebook event header 1920×1005, Eventbrite header 2160×1080, X header 1500×500, Open Graph 1200×630, email header 1200×400, and YouTube thumbnail 1280×720; verify live platform specifications before production.
- 3 additional social adaptations: One reel cover 1080×1920, one X post 1600×900 and one LinkedIn square 1080×1080 derived from approved creative.
- 1 vertical motion reel: One 15–30-second motion edit from supplied imagery;1080×1920 MP4 adapted for TikTok and YouTube Shorts, captions where speech used; original filming excluded.
- 1 press release: One release up to 600 words in DOCX/PDF with approved event facts.
- 1 media advisory: One advisory up to 300 words in DOCX/PDF; distribution not included unless explicitly scoped.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event, one venue, one organizer, up to two social accounts and one client email platform; up to eight social publishing placements if access is provided.
- Pages, words and records
- One event; four original social concepts and their listed adaptations; release 600 words, advisory 300, listing 300, shortlisting 80, email 400; four captions 150 words each.
- Formats
- Press PDFs for poster/handbill/flyer; JPG/PNG platform sizes listed in deliverables; vertical H.264 MP4; DOCX/PDF press copy; final platform specifications checked before export.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute approval review.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed event/venue/date/time, ticket URL, performer names, licensed artwork, brand assets and one release approver.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15–20 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, preserving the current three-to-four-week allowance.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for full per show campaign — one event.
- Review event visual system and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Original onsite filming, full-length video, complex animation, extra edits beyond the specified supplied-media motion reel, physical printing and media distribution require a separately accepted quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
On Site Event Documentation, Half DayEvent SupportIncluded scope and billingOn Site Event Documentation, Half Day$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 half-day capture session: A 240-minute consecutive onsite capture window at one event, recording photographs and selected video highlights.
- 40 edited event photographs: Forty selected photographs, color/tonal correction, high-resolution JPEG and web JPEG; no duplicate exports counted as additional photos.
- 1 video highlight: One 45–60-second 1920×1080 H.264 MP4 with simple titles and licensed or client-cleared audio.
- 1 vertical excerpt: One 15–30-second 1080×1920 adaptation of the highlight, with readable caption text where speech is used.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event at one venue; one planned capture operator; crew feasibility confirmed before booking.
- Pages, words and records
- 40 proposed final photographs; a 240-minute consecutive capture window retained from current store.
- Formats
- High-resolution/web JPEG; 1080p landscape MP4; 1080×1920 vertical MP4; SRT for intelligible spoken content.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute capture briefing; one consolidated remote selects review.
- Client inputs
- Run of show, venue access, shot priorities, filming permissions/releases, event contact and cleared music if required.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Capture on the accepted calendar after complete inputs; initial edited highlights and photo package within five business days after capture. Each of two consolidated revision rounds returns within three business days of complete feedback; client-delayed revisions are outside the initial-delivery clock.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for on site event documentation, half day.
- Review half-day capture session and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Uninterrupted multi-camera performance recording, raw media transfer, live streaming and extensive object removal are separate.
- Photo/video coverage feasibility depends on event schedule; no promise that every moment is captured.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingOn Site Event Documentation, Half Day$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 half-day capture session: A 240-minute consecutive onsite capture window at one event, recording photographs and selected video highlights.
- 40 edited event photographs: Forty selected photographs, color/tonal correction, high-resolution JPEG and web JPEG; no duplicate exports counted as additional photos.
- 1 video highlight: One 45–60-second 1920×1080 H.264 MP4 with simple titles and licensed or client-cleared audio.
- 1 vertical excerpt: One 15–30-second 1080×1920 adaptation of the highlight, with readable caption text where speech is used.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event at one venue; one planned capture operator; crew feasibility confirmed before booking.
- Pages, words and records
- 40 proposed final photographs; a 240-minute consecutive capture window retained from current store.
- Formats
- High-resolution/web JPEG; 1080p landscape MP4; 1080×1920 vertical MP4; SRT for intelligible spoken content.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute capture briefing; one consolidated remote selects review.
- Client inputs
- Run of show, venue access, shot priorities, filming permissions/releases, event contact and cleared music if required.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Capture on the accepted calendar after complete inputs; initial edited highlights and photo package within five business days after capture. Each of two consolidated revision rounds returns within three business days of complete feedback; client-delayed revisions are outside the initial-delivery clock.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for on site event documentation, half day.
- Review half-day capture session and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Uninterrupted multi-camera performance recording, raw media transfer, live streaming and extensive object removal are separate.
- Photo/video coverage feasibility depends on event schedule; no promise that every moment is captured.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Venue Marketing Retainer — Defined Monthly CalendarEvent SupportIncluded scope and billingVenue Marketing Retainer — Defined Monthly Calendar$6,300 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 4 compact per-show campaign sets per month: For each of up to four events: one event key visual adapted to poster PDF 11×17, one event listing up to 200 words, two original social message concepts with square/portrait exports and two individual story frames. These units are included in the shared monthly content totals, not added or billed again. Existing contracted interpretations remain in force.
- 8 original social concepts per month: Eight distinct social message concepts total, two per show, derived from venue templates; captions up to 150 words, square/portrait versions and up to 16 placements across two managed accounts. Counted within the four compact kits.
- 8 individual story frames per month: Eight individual 1080×1920 frames total, two per show; included in the four compact kits.
- 1 monthly venue email: One email up to 600 words covering the four events; test proof and one scheduled send to a consented client list.
- 4 calendar updates per month: Up to four event entries on one existing calendar; up to 200 words each.
- 1 monthly report: Ticket-link click and platform metrics where accessible, with one 30-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One venue, one existing website calendar, two social accounts and one email platform.
- Pages, words and records
- Four compact show kits/month; eight original messages,16 static exports,16 publishing placements and eight story frames; one monthly 600-word email and four calendar entries 200 words each.
- Formats
- Four poster PDFs 11×17;16 static JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350; eight story PNG 1080×1920; native email; calendar copy and PDF report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute onboarding session; one 30-minute planning meeting and one 30-minute report review per month.
- Client inputs
- Monthly confirmed calendar at least 10 business days before planned release, ticket links, artist assets/permissions and named venue approver.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- First calendar in 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; monthly production follows the agreed calendar.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for venue marketing retainer — defined monthly calendar.
- Review event campaign briefs per month and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional events, paid media, ticketing operations, onsite capture and daily audience response are separately scoped.
- The source promise of every show requires custom quote when the venue calendar exceeds four events.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingVenue Marketing Retainer — Defined Monthly Calendar$6,300 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 4 compact per-show campaign sets per month: For each of up to four events: one event key visual adapted to poster PDF 11×17, one event listing up to 200 words, two original social message concepts with square/portrait exports and two individual story frames. These units are included in the shared monthly content totals, not added or billed again. Existing contracted interpretations remain in force.
- 8 original social concepts per month: Eight distinct social message concepts total, two per show, derived from venue templates; captions up to 150 words, square/portrait versions and up to 16 placements across two managed accounts. Counted within the four compact kits.
- 8 individual story frames per month: Eight individual 1080×1920 frames total, two per show; included in the four compact kits.
- 1 monthly venue email: One email up to 600 words covering the four events; test proof and one scheduled send to a consented client list.
- 4 calendar updates per month: Up to four event entries on one existing calendar; up to 200 words each.
- 1 monthly report: Ticket-link click and platform metrics where accessible, with one 30-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One venue, one existing website calendar, two social accounts and one email platform.
- Pages, words and records
- Four compact show kits/month; eight original messages,16 static exports,16 publishing placements and eight story frames; one monthly 600-word email and four calendar entries 200 words each.
- Formats
- Four poster PDFs 11×17;16 static JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350; eight story PNG 1080×1920; native email; calendar copy and PDF report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute onboarding session; one 30-minute planning meeting and one 30-minute report review per month.
- Client inputs
- Monthly confirmed calendar at least 10 business days before planned release, ticket links, artist assets/permissions and named venue approver.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- First calendar in 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; monthly production follows the agreed calendar.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for venue marketing retainer — defined monthly calendar.
- Review event campaign briefs per month and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional events, paid media, ticketing operations, onsite capture and daily audience response are separately scoped.
- The source promise of every show requires custom quote when the venue calendar exceeds four events.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,300 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
On Site Event Documentation, Full DayEvent SupportIncluded scope and billingOn Site Event Documentation, Full Day$7,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 full-day capture session: A 480-minute onsite capture window at one event, including agreed break arrangements and planned photo/video priorities.
- 80 edited event photographs: Eighty distinct selects with color correction, full-resolution and web JPEG versions.
- 1 event highlight reel: One 2–3-minute 1920×1080 H.264 edit using captured footage, titles and cleared music.
- 1 social cut: One 30–60-second 1080×1920 cut derived from the reel; captions for audible speech.
- 1 recap piece: One event recap of 500–700 words with five selected image references.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event at one venue; crew plan agreed for simultaneous photography and video.
- Pages, words and records
- A 480-minute capture window;80 proposed photographs; one 2–3-minute reel; one social cut;700 recap words.
- Formats
- JPEG full/web; H.264 MP4 landscape/vertical; SRT and DOCX/PDF recap.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute production briefing and one 30-minute edit review.
- Client inputs
- Run of show, subject priorities, access/filming permissions, releases, event details and approved names.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Initial highlight reel, photo gallery and recap delivered within seven calendar days after the event, preserving the published deadline. The accepted booking records the exact delivery date and timezone, including weekend/holiday feasibility. Production begins after required inputs and the scheduled capture. Included feedback corrections are scheduled within three business days of complete consolidated feedback; this does not replace or extend the initial seven-calendar-day promise.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for on site event documentation, full day.
- Review full-day capture session and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Multi-day coverage, full-length performance capture, raw media delivery and live broadcasting require separate quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingOn Site Event Documentation, Full Day$7,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 full-day capture session: A 480-minute onsite capture window at one event, including agreed break arrangements and planned photo/video priorities.
- 80 edited event photographs: Eighty distinct selects with color correction, full-resolution and web JPEG versions.
- 1 event highlight reel: One 2–3-minute 1920×1080 H.264 edit using captured footage, titles and cleared music.
- 1 social cut: One 30–60-second 1080×1920 cut derived from the reel; captions for audible speech.
- 1 recap piece: One event recap of 500–700 words with five selected image references.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event at one venue; crew plan agreed for simultaneous photography and video.
- Pages, words and records
- A 480-minute capture window;80 proposed photographs; one 2–3-minute reel; one social cut;700 recap words.
- Formats
- JPEG full/web; H.264 MP4 landscape/vertical; SRT and DOCX/PDF recap.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute production briefing and one 30-minute edit review.
- Client inputs
- Run of show, subject priorities, access/filming permissions, releases, event details and approved names.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Initial highlight reel, photo gallery and recap delivered within seven calendar days after the event, preserving the published deadline. The accepted booking records the exact delivery date and timezone, including weekend/holiday feasibility. Production begins after required inputs and the scheduled capture. Included feedback corrections are scheduled within three business days of complete consolidated feedback; this does not replace or extend the initial seven-calendar-day promise.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for on site event documentation, full day.
- Review full-day capture session and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Multi-day coverage, full-length performance capture, raw media delivery and live broadcasting require separate quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $7,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Theatre Production CampaignEvent SupportIncluded scope and billingTheatre Production Campaign$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 production poster: One approved key visual; press PDFs at 11×17 and 18×24 inches.
- 1 program: One 12-page US Letter or 5.5×8.5-inch booklet, up to 3,000 supplied/edited words and 20 credited images.
- 1 playbill advertisement: One full-page or half-page ad at one publisher-supplied specification.
- 8 original social concepts: Eight original concepts over an eight-week social rollout, one per week; captions up to 150 words, square/portrait adaptations and up to 16 placements across two accounts.
- 8 individual story frames: Eight 1080×1920 opening/countdown/cast frames.
- 1 opening-night press package: One release up to 600 words, one media fact sheet up to 400 words and pitches to up to 10 approved media contacts; one follow-up each.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One production run at one venue; up to two social accounts and one approved press contact list.
- Pages, words and records
- 12 program pages; 3,000 program words; 20 program images; 10 press recipients.
- Formats
- Press PDF; 1080×1080/1350 static; 1080×1920 stories; DOCX/PDF press materials.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute kickoff and two 30-minute approval meetings.
- Client inputs
- Rights-cleared production title/art, cast and crew credits, production license restrictions, ticket URL, sponsor ads and one production approver.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Six business weeks for initial campaign production after complete inputs and scheduled start; social rollout spans eight scheduled weeks.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for theatre production campaign.
- Review production poster and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Printing/postage, cast photography, rehearsal filming, ad placement spend and guaranteed coverage are outside this scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingTheatre Production Campaign$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 production poster: One approved key visual; press PDFs at 11×17 and 18×24 inches.
- 1 program: One 12-page US Letter or 5.5×8.5-inch booklet, up to 3,000 supplied/edited words and 20 credited images.
- 1 playbill advertisement: One full-page or half-page ad at one publisher-supplied specification.
- 8 original social concepts: Eight original concepts over an eight-week social rollout, one per week; captions up to 150 words, square/portrait adaptations and up to 16 placements across two accounts.
- 8 individual story frames: Eight 1080×1920 opening/countdown/cast frames.
- 1 opening-night press package: One release up to 600 words, one media fact sheet up to 400 words and pitches to up to 10 approved media contacts; one follow-up each.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One production run at one venue; up to two social accounts and one approved press contact list.
- Pages, words and records
- 12 program pages; 3,000 program words; 20 program images; 10 press recipients.
- Formats
- Press PDF; 1080×1080/1350 static; 1080×1920 stories; DOCX/PDF press materials.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute kickoff and two 30-minute approval meetings.
- Client inputs
- Rights-cleared production title/art, cast and crew credits, production license restrictions, ticket URL, sponsor ads and one production approver.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Six business weeks for initial campaign production after complete inputs and scheduled start; social rollout spans eight scheduled weeks.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for theatre production campaign.
- Review production poster and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Printing/postage, cast photography, rehearsal filming, ad placement spend and guaranteed coverage are outside this scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $8,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Multi Event Series Pack — Four EventsEvent SupportIncluded scope and billingMulti Event Series Pack — Four Events$11,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 shared series identity: One visual system for four events with shared type, color and image treatment.
- 4 event campaign sets: Four complete per-show gcm-1802 kits. Each includes poster/handbill/flyer, web/Facebook/Eventbrite/X/email headers, Instagram square/portrait/reel cover, TikTok and YouTube vertical motion reel, YouTube thumbnail, X/LinkedIn post, Open Graph, press release up to 600 words and advisory up to 300 words. No separate component charge.
- 16 original social message concepts: Sixteen distinct message concepts across four campaigns, all derived from the shared series identity;32 square/portrait static exports and up to 32 managed publishing placements. No independent visual identity per message.
- 1 series calendar: A coordinated publication schedule for all four events with four ticket URLs and tracking conventions.
- 1 calendar landing page: One page on the existing client website, four event blocks and ticket links, up to 800 words; responsive layout and approval check.
- 16 individual story frames: Four 1080×1920 frames per event, derived from the four campaign kits; included once in total scope.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Four events in one series; up to two venues under one organizer; two social accounts and one email platform.
- Pages, words and records
- Exactly four full campaigns,16 original social concepts,16 individual story frames, one calendar landing page, four releases and four advisories.
- Formats
- Print PDF; JPG/PNG 1080×1080,1080×1350,1080×1920; editable schedule and copy.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute series kickoff; four 20-minute event check-ins.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed four-event calendar, licensed performer art/bios, venue details, ticket URLs and one approver for the series.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Six business weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start; four release dates agreed in advance.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for multi event series pack — four events.
- Review shared series identity and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Fifth and later events, onsite coverage, ticketing and paid media require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMulti Event Series Pack — Four Events$11,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 shared series identity: One visual system for four events with shared type, color and image treatment.
- 4 event campaign sets: Four complete per-show gcm-1802 kits. Each includes poster/handbill/flyer, web/Facebook/Eventbrite/X/email headers, Instagram square/portrait/reel cover, TikTok and YouTube vertical motion reel, YouTube thumbnail, X/LinkedIn post, Open Graph, press release up to 600 words and advisory up to 300 words. No separate component charge.
- 16 original social message concepts: Sixteen distinct message concepts across four campaigns, all derived from the shared series identity;32 square/portrait static exports and up to 32 managed publishing placements. No independent visual identity per message.
- 1 series calendar: A coordinated publication schedule for all four events with four ticket URLs and tracking conventions.
- 1 calendar landing page: One page on the existing client website, four event blocks and ticket links, up to 800 words; responsive layout and approval check.
- 16 individual story frames: Four 1080×1920 frames per event, derived from the four campaign kits; included once in total scope.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Four events in one series; up to two venues under one organizer; two social accounts and one email platform.
- Pages, words and records
- Exactly four full campaigns,16 original social concepts,16 individual story frames, one calendar landing page, four releases and four advisories.
- Formats
- Print PDF; JPG/PNG 1080×1080,1080×1350,1080×1920; editable schedule and copy.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute series kickoff; four 20-minute event check-ins.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed four-event calendar, licensed performer art/bios, venue details, ticket URLs and one approver for the series.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Six business weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start; four release dates agreed in advance.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for multi event series pack — four events.
- Review shared series identity and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Fifth and later events, onsite coverage, ticketing and paid media require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $11,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Festival or Multi Day Event Campaign — Custom ScopeEvent SupportIncluded scope and billingFestival or Multi Day Event Campaign — Custom Scope$21,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 festival visual identity: One key visual, color/type specification and logo-lockup arrangement using supplied event marks.
- 1 lineup grid: Up to 20 artists across up to three stages and three event days; one landscape and one portrait layout.
- 1 public event schedule: One schedule with up to 40 timed program entries; accessible text version plus print/screen layouts.
- 20 artist promo tiles: For each of up to 20 artists, one template populated from approved supplied image/copy and exported as 1080×1080 square and 1080×1350 portrait:40 exports total. These are shared-identity adaptations, not 20 bespoke concepts.
- 6 original festival social concepts: Six unique announcement/logistics/countdown concepts, each adapted for square/portrait; up to 12 placements across two accounts.
- 8 onsite sign layouts: Eight distinct directional/information signs, each in one print size up to 24×36 inches.
- 1 campaign production calendar: One campaign schedule with approvals, ticket links and final supplier handoff dates.
- 2 wrap social concepts: Two post-event recap concepts using client-supplied event images, up to 150 caption words each; square/portrait exports and up tofour placements across two accounts.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One festival organizer; up to three days, three stages, 20 artists and two social accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- 40 schedule entries;20 artist packs with 40 exports; eight original festival messages total (six pre-event/two wrap),16 square/portrait exports and up to 16 managed placements; eight sign layouts.
- Formats
- Press PDF; 1080×1080/1350 JPG/PNG; schedule PDF plus text; sign files to approved vendor specs.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute kickoff and four 30-minute production reviews.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed artist roster/schedule, venue map, artist permissions and technical specs, ticket links, sponsor restrictions and production approver.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 8–12 business weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start; wrap posts within five business days of receipt of approved event selects.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for festival or multi day event campaign — custom scope.
- Review festival visual identity and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Onsite staffing, installation, fabrication, stage production, ticketing, security and unlimited lineup revisions excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingFestival or Multi Day Event Campaign — Custom Scope$21,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 festival visual identity: One key visual, color/type specification and logo-lockup arrangement using supplied event marks.
- 1 lineup grid: Up to 20 artists across up to three stages and three event days; one landscape and one portrait layout.
- 1 public event schedule: One schedule with up to 40 timed program entries; accessible text version plus print/screen layouts.
- 20 artist promo tiles: For each of up to 20 artists, one template populated from approved supplied image/copy and exported as 1080×1080 square and 1080×1350 portrait:40 exports total. These are shared-identity adaptations, not 20 bespoke concepts.
- 6 original festival social concepts: Six unique announcement/logistics/countdown concepts, each adapted for square/portrait; up to 12 placements across two accounts.
- 8 onsite sign layouts: Eight distinct directional/information signs, each in one print size up to 24×36 inches.
- 1 campaign production calendar: One campaign schedule with approvals, ticket links and final supplier handoff dates.
- 2 wrap social concepts: Two post-event recap concepts using client-supplied event images, up to 150 caption words each; square/portrait exports and up tofour placements across two accounts.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One festival organizer; up to three days, three stages, 20 artists and two social accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- 40 schedule entries;20 artist packs with 40 exports; eight original festival messages total (six pre-event/two wrap),16 square/portrait exports and up to 16 managed placements; eight sign layouts.
- Formats
- Press PDF; 1080×1080/1350 JPG/PNG; schedule PDF plus text; sign files to approved vendor specs.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute kickoff and four 30-minute production reviews.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed artist roster/schedule, venue map, artist permissions and technical specs, ticket links, sponsor restrictions and production approver.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 8–12 business weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start; wrap posts within five business days of receipt of approved event selects.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
- Approve working plan for festival or multi day event campaign — custom scope.
- Review festival visual identity and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
- Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.
Separate costs and exclusions- Onsite staffing, installation, fabrication, stage production, ticketing, security and unlimited lineup revisions excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $21,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Watercolor / Artwork Reproduction PrepPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingWatercolor / Artwork Reproduction Prep$625 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 artwork digitization: High-resolution scan or approved capture of one original artwork up to 18×24 inches; document source dimensions and color target.
- 1 color-corrected master: One 16-bit TIFF master with embedded profile, crop and reproduction cleanup; source fidelity proof.
- 3 reproduction exports: One print TIFF, one print PDF at agreed dimensions and one web JPEG; resizing is not a new artwork.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One physical original and one intended reproduction vendor.
- Pages, words and records
- One artwork up to 18×24 inches; master resolution set to 300 ppi at approved output size.
- Formats
- Profiled TIFF/PDF; sRGB JPEG.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute reproduction briefing and one proof review.
- Client inputs
- Original artwork, preferred print size/media, vendor profile/specification and authority to reproduce.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days per work after receipt of the artwork, complete specifications and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for watercolor / artwork reproduction prep.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Restoration of damaged originals, physical printing, framing and extra artwork require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingWatercolor / Artwork Reproduction Prep$625 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 artwork digitization: High-resolution scan or approved capture of one original artwork up to 18×24 inches; document source dimensions and color target.
- 1 color-corrected master: One 16-bit TIFF master with embedded profile, crop and reproduction cleanup; source fidelity proof.
- 3 reproduction exports: One print TIFF, one print PDF at agreed dimensions and one web JPEG; resizing is not a new artwork.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One physical original and one intended reproduction vendor.
- Pages, words and records
- One artwork up to 18×24 inches; master resolution set to 300 ppi at approved output size.
- Formats
- Profiled TIFF/PDF; sRGB JPEG.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute reproduction briefing and one proof review.
- Client inputs
- Original artwork, preferred print size/media, vendor profile/specification and authority to reproduce.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days per work after receipt of the artwork, complete specifications and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for watercolor / artwork reproduction prep.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Restoration of damaged originals, physical printing, framing and extra artwork require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $625 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Sticker Design + Small Print RunPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingSticker Design + Small Print Run$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 sticker design: One design with proposed maximum 4×4-inch finished size and one die-cut outline.
- 1 print-ready package: Vector PDF plus transparent PNG and one vendor proof check.
- 1 included starter print run: 100–250 physical stickers as published; exact count within that range, stock, finish and delivery address set in the accepted order before purchase.
- 1 vendor coordination: One printer, one proof cycle and one shipment tracked.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one sticker design, one print vendor and one delivery address.
- Pages, words and records
- One design; included published run 100–250 stickers.
- Formats
- Vector PDF; PNG 300 ppi at approved size; print vendor dieline.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute brief and one digital proof review.
- Client inputs
- Approved logo/text, rights-cleared art, preferred size/finish, quantity within 100–250 and delivery address.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; vendor production and transit dates must fit the accepted delivery plan.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for sticker design + small print run.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional designs, runs above 250, specialty stock outside the approved allowance and extra destinations require written quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSticker Design + Small Print Run$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 sticker design: One design with proposed maximum 4×4-inch finished size and one die-cut outline.
- 1 print-ready package: Vector PDF plus transparent PNG and one vendor proof check.
- 1 included starter print run: 100–250 physical stickers as published; exact count within that range, stock, finish and delivery address set in the accepted order before purchase.
- 1 vendor coordination: One printer, one proof cycle and one shipment tracked.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one sticker design, one print vendor and one delivery address.
- Pages, words and records
- One design; included published run 100–250 stickers.
- Formats
- Vector PDF; PNG 300 ppi at approved size; print vendor dieline.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute brief and one digital proof review.
- Client inputs
- Approved logo/text, rights-cleared art, preferred size/finish, quantity within 100–250 and delivery address.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; vendor production and transit dates must fit the accepted delivery plan.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for sticker design + small print run.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional designs, runs above 250, specialty stock outside the approved allowance and extra destinations require written quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Business Card Design + Print RunPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingBusiness Card Design + Print Run$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 two-sided business card design: One name/contact identity, front and back at 3.5×2 inches; up to 80 words total.
- 250 printed business cards: 250 cards included as stated in current store; stock/finish and vendor allowance approved before purchase.
- 1 print production package: Press PDF with bleed/crop settings, web proof and one printer proof review.
- 1 vendor coordination and delivery: One print run to one delivery address.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One person or organizational contact, one printer, one address.
- Pages, words and records
- One front/back design;250 printed cards.
- Formats
- Press PDF; JPEG proof;3.5×2-inch trim with vendor bleed.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute intake and one proof approval.
- Client inputs
- Exact name/title/contact data, logo files, destination address and stock/finish selection.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, subject to the approved print-production and transit schedule.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for business card design + print run.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Multiple staff names, extra quantities, foil/embossing outside allowance and expedited transit require written quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBusiness Card Design + Print Run$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 two-sided business card design: One name/contact identity, front and back at 3.5×2 inches; up to 80 words total.
- 250 printed business cards: 250 cards included as stated in current store; stock/finish and vendor allowance approved before purchase.
- 1 print production package: Press PDF with bleed/crop settings, web proof and one printer proof review.
- 1 vendor coordination and delivery: One print run to one delivery address.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One person or organizational contact, one printer, one address.
- Pages, words and records
- One front/back design;250 printed cards.
- Formats
- Press PDF; JPEG proof;3.5×2-inch trim with vendor bleed.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute intake and one proof approval.
- Client inputs
- Exact name/title/contact data, logo files, destination address and stock/finish selection.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, subject to the approved print-production and transit schedule.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for business card design + print run.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Multiple staff names, extra quantities, foil/embossing outside allowance and expedited transit require written quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Mug, Tote, or Accessory DesignPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingMug, Tote, or Accessory Design$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 accessory surface design: One approved design for one mug, tote, hat or other agreed accessory surface; one manufacturer template.
- 1 production file package: One vector PDF where applicable, one transparent 300 ppi PNG and one placement proof at the vendor’s actual dimensions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One product type, one imprint surface, one vendor template.
- Pages, words and records
- One design; proposed artwork maximum 12×16 inches or the smaller vendor imprint limit.
- Formats
- Vector PDF and transparent PNG 300 ppi; JPEG placement proof.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute brief and one proof review.
- Client inputs
- Vendor template, dimensions, logo/text/art, material/color and intended print process.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; this preserves the newer store addendum’s one-week delivery rather than the older two-week block.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated review round as stated in the current store addendum; errors against approved specifications are corrections, while a new concept needs written scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for mug, tote, or accessory design.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Physical products, printing, embroidery digitizing and additional surfaces require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMug, Tote, or Accessory Design$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 accessory surface design: One approved design for one mug, tote, hat or other agreed accessory surface; one manufacturer template.
- 1 production file package: One vector PDF where applicable, one transparent 300 ppi PNG and one placement proof at the vendor’s actual dimensions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One product type, one imprint surface, one vendor template.
- Pages, words and records
- One design; proposed artwork maximum 12×16 inches or the smaller vendor imprint limit.
- Formats
- Vector PDF and transparent PNG 300 ppi; JPEG placement proof.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute brief and one proof review.
- Client inputs
- Vendor template, dimensions, logo/text/art, material/color and intended print process.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; this preserves the newer store addendum’s one-week delivery rather than the older two-week block.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated review round as stated in the current store addendum; errors against approved specifications are corrections, while a new concept needs written scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for mug, tote, or accessory design.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Physical products, printing, embroidery digitizing and additional surfaces require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Hangtag + Label DesignPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingHangtag + Label Design$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 hangtag or label design: One chosen hangtag, product label or packaging label, one SKU, up to two faces, maximum 8×10 inches per face.
- 1 production package: One print PDF, one dieline layer and one proof image with client-supplied ingredient/warning/barcode copy.
- 1 vendor coordination: One manufacturer specification review and one proof check.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One SKU, one chosen packaging component and one vendor.
- Pages, words and records
- One design up to two faces; up to 250 supplied words.
- Formats
- Press PDF with bleed and dieline;300 ppi proof PNG.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute specifications meeting and one proof review.
- Client inputs
- Exact regulatory/product copy supplied by client, barcode, dimensions, material, logo and printer dieline.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for hangtag + label design.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Regulatory/legal certification, barcode registration, physical production and additional SKUs require separate services.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingHangtag + Label Design$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 hangtag or label design: One chosen hangtag, product label or packaging label, one SKU, up to two faces, maximum 8×10 inches per face.
- 1 production package: One print PDF, one dieline layer and one proof image with client-supplied ingredient/warning/barcode copy.
- 1 vendor coordination: One manufacturer specification review and one proof check.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One SKU, one chosen packaging component and one vendor.
- Pages, words and records
- One design up to two faces; up to 250 supplied words.
- Formats
- Press PDF with bleed and dieline;300 ppi proof PNG.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute specifications meeting and one proof review.
- Client inputs
- Exact regulatory/product copy supplied by client, barcode, dimensions, material, logo and printer dieline.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for hangtag + label design.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Regulatory/legal certification, barcode registration, physical production and additional SKUs require separate services.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
T Shirt DesignPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingT Shirt Design$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 T-shirt design: One artwork composition for one garment imprint surface; up to four spot colors or one full-color process file.
- 1 print-ready package: Vector PDF/SVG where supported, transparent 300 ppi PNG, placement mockup and color separations when the approved print process requires them.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One garment style, one imprint surface and one printer process.
- Pages, words and records
- One design; two refinements retained from GCM source.
- Formats
- Vector PDF/SVG,300 ppi PNG and separated spot-color PDF when required.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute creative brief and one consolidated proof review per refinement.
- Client inputs
- Brand/artist assets, exact wording, garment color, print dimensions and vendor process.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start is the proposed target preserving the newer one-week addendum; schedule accommodates two refinements.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated refinement rounds retained from GCM source. A new concept or added print surface is a change in scope; correcting agreed specifications is not a new direction.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for t shirt design.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Garment printing, additional imprint surfaces, embroidered digitizing and a replacement creative concept require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingT Shirt Design$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 T-shirt design: One artwork composition for one garment imprint surface; up to four spot colors or one full-color process file.
- 1 print-ready package: Vector PDF/SVG where supported, transparent 300 ppi PNG, placement mockup and color separations when the approved print process requires them.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One garment style, one imprint surface and one printer process.
- Pages, words and records
- One design; two refinements retained from GCM source.
- Formats
- Vector PDF/SVG,300 ppi PNG and separated spot-color PDF when required.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute creative brief and one consolidated proof review per refinement.
- Client inputs
- Brand/artist assets, exact wording, garment color, print dimensions and vendor process.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start is the proposed target preserving the newer one-week addendum; schedule accommodates two refinements.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated refinement rounds retained from GCM source. A new concept or added print surface is a change in scope; correcting agreed specifications is not a new direction.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for t shirt design.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Garment printing, additional imprint surfaces, embroidered digitizing and a replacement creative concept require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Poster DesignPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingPoster Design$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 poster design: One poster at the client’s choice of 11×17 or 18×24 inches; up to 250 words and five supplied images.
- 1 print-ready export: One press PDF with bleed and embedded/outlined fonts according to printer specs.
- 1 web version: One RGB JPG at 1080×1350 or a proportionate poster preview; one agreed size.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One poster subject and one printer specification.
- Pages, words and records
- One design at 11×17 or 18×24 inches;250 words; five images.
- Formats
- CMYK press PDF where printer requires; sRGB JPG web proof.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute brief and one consolidated proof review.
- Client inputs
- Final event/product facts, artwork licenses, brand assets and printer specifications.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, preserving current addendum’s one-week target; older main text states two weeks.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated review round from current addendum; corrections to approved content/specifications are distinct from new direction.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for poster design.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Printing, extra sizes beyond the included web export and added versions for different events require quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPoster Design$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 poster design: One poster at the client’s choice of 11×17 or 18×24 inches; up to 250 words and five supplied images.
- 1 print-ready export: One press PDF with bleed and embedded/outlined fonts according to printer specs.
- 1 web version: One RGB JPG at 1080×1350 or a proportionate poster preview; one agreed size.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One poster subject and one printer specification.
- Pages, words and records
- One design at 11×17 or 18×24 inches;250 words; five images.
- Formats
- CMYK press PDF where printer requires; sRGB JPG web proof.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute brief and one consolidated proof review.
- Client inputs
- Final event/product facts, artwork licenses, brand assets and printer specifications.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, preserving current addendum’s one-week target; older main text states two weeks.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated review round from current addendum; corrections to approved content/specifications are distinct from new direction.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for poster design.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Printing, extra sizes beyond the included web export and added versions for different events require quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Album Art PrintsPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingAlbum Art Prints$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 artwork reproduction preparation: One existing album artwork prepared at one fine-art size up to 18×24 inches, with profile, resolution and bleed checked.
- 1 included first fine-art print run: 25–50 prints retained from current store; exact quantity in this range, stock, size and vendor cost allowance fixed in the accepted order.
- 1 vendor setup and proof cycle: One vendor account/specification setup, one physical or digital proof review and one coordinated shipment.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One album image, one print size, one vendor and one destination.
- Pages, words and records
- Included initial run 25–50 prints; no new art concept.
- Formats
- Print-ready TIFF/PDF at approved size/profile; JPEG proof.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute reproduction brief and one proof review.
- Client inputs
- High-resolution album art, reproduction rights, print size/paper preference and shipping address.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; accepted schedule must include vendor production/transit.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for album art prints.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- New album-art design, framing, extra print runs and multiple destinations require separate quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingAlbum Art Prints$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 artwork reproduction preparation: One existing album artwork prepared at one fine-art size up to 18×24 inches, with profile, resolution and bleed checked.
- 1 included first fine-art print run: 25–50 prints retained from current store; exact quantity in this range, stock, size and vendor cost allowance fixed in the accepted order.
- 1 vendor setup and proof cycle: One vendor account/specification setup, one physical or digital proof review and one coordinated shipment.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One album image, one print size, one vendor and one destination.
- Pages, words and records
- Included initial run 25–50 prints; no new art concept.
- Formats
- Print-ready TIFF/PDF at approved size/profile; JPEG proof.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute reproduction brief and one proof review.
- Client inputs
- High-resolution album art, reproduction rights, print size/paper preference and shipping address.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; accepted schedule must include vendor production/transit.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for album art prints.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- New album-art design, framing, extra print runs and multiple destinations require separate quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
T Shirt + Print Production SetupPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingT Shirt + Print Production Setup$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 T-shirt design: One artwork composition for one imprint surface, vector/raster exports and color separations if needed.
- 1 vendor production setup: Configure one Printful, Stitch Texas or approved printer, one garment style and up to six size/color variants.
- 1 first production order coordination: One client-approved first order of up to 100 units as a proposed administrative cap; proof/specification review, order handoff and status tracking. Published per-unit production is billed at cost.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One vendor, garment style and imprint surface; up to six variants.
- Pages, words and records
- One design and one coordinated order;100-unit administrative cap proposed.
- Formats
- Vector PDF and 300 ppi PNG; vendor product/size matrix and approval proof.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute design/production kickoff and one 30-minute proof review.
- Client inputs
- Artwork/brand files, garment selections, size breakdown, delivery address and approved vendor budget.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, with the vendor lead time identified before acceptance.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for t shirt + print production setup.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional designs/surfaces, stocked inventory handling, fulfillment and additional orders require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingT Shirt + Print Production Setup$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 T-shirt design: One artwork composition for one imprint surface, vector/raster exports and color separations if needed.
- 1 vendor production setup: Configure one Printful, Stitch Texas or approved printer, one garment style and up to six size/color variants.
- 1 first production order coordination: One client-approved first order of up to 100 units as a proposed administrative cap; proof/specification review, order handoff and status tracking. Published per-unit production is billed at cost.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One vendor, garment style and imprint surface; up to six variants.
- Pages, words and records
- One design and one coordinated order;100-unit administrative cap proposed.
- Formats
- Vector PDF and 300 ppi PNG; vendor product/size matrix and approval proof.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute design/production kickoff and one 30-minute proof review.
- Client inputs
- Artwork/brand files, garment selections, size breakdown, delivery address and approved vendor budget.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, with the vendor lead time identified before acceptance.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for t shirt + print production setup.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional designs/surfaces, stocked inventory handling, fulfillment and additional orders require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Brochure / Tri Fold DesignPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingBrochure / Tri Fold Design$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 tri-fold brochure: One six-panel brochure on 8.5×11-inch flat stock, up to 1,200 supplied words edited for clarity and up to 10 supplied images.
- 1 print-ready package: One press PDF, folded panel order proof and a screen-readable PDF.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization/campaign, one printer and one folded format.
- Pages, words and records
- Six panels;1,200 words;10 images.
- Formats
- Press PDF with vendor bleed; screen PDF with links where supplied.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute brief and one 30-minute folded-proof review.
- Client inputs
- Draft copy, logos/photos with rights, contact/CTA details and printer fold specifications.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for brochure / tri fold design.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Printing, original photography, translation and a new research-based copywriting project are separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBrochure / Tri Fold Design$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 tri-fold brochure: One six-panel brochure on 8.5×11-inch flat stock, up to 1,200 supplied words edited for clarity and up to 10 supplied images.
- 1 print-ready package: One press PDF, folded panel order proof and a screen-readable PDF.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization/campaign, one printer and one folded format.
- Pages, words and records
- Six panels;1,200 words;10 images.
- Formats
- Press PDF with vendor bleed; screen PDF with links where supplied.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute brief and one 30-minute folded-proof review.
- Client inputs
- Draft copy, logos/photos with rights, contact/CTA details and printer fold specifications.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for brochure / tri fold design.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Printing, original photography, translation and a new research-based copywriting project are separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Walmart / Amazon Retailer Asset Pack — One SKU GroupPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingWalmart / Amazon Retailer Asset Pack — One SKU Group$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 retailer logo set: One existing brand mark exported in three formats/sizes according to one chosen retailer’s verified requirements.
- 7 product image exports: Up to seven client-supplied images cleaned/cropped for one SKU group; includes one primary on-white image and up to six secondary/detail images.
- 1 listing copy set: One title up to 200 characters, five bullets up to 200 characters each and description up to 500 words, subject to retailer category rules; up to five variants share the approved base copy.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One retailer (Walmart, Amazon or Target), one SKU group and up to five variants.
- Pages, words and records
- Seven images, one listing copy set, three logo exports.
- Formats
- Retailer-required JPG/PNG dimensions confirmed at start; copy in DOCX/CSV.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute SKU/specification intake and one 30-minute proof review.
- Client inputs
- Product facts/specs, retailer category, SKU/variant matrix, trademark assets and cleared product photos.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for walmart / amazon retailer asset pack — one sku group.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Photography, seller-account applications, retailer fees, translation and compliance/approval guarantees are excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingWalmart / Amazon Retailer Asset Pack — One SKU Group$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 retailer logo set: One existing brand mark exported in three formats/sizes according to one chosen retailer’s verified requirements.
- 7 product image exports: Up to seven client-supplied images cleaned/cropped for one SKU group; includes one primary on-white image and up to six secondary/detail images.
- 1 listing copy set: One title up to 200 characters, five bullets up to 200 characters each and description up to 500 words, subject to retailer category rules; up to five variants share the approved base copy.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One retailer (Walmart, Amazon or Target), one SKU group and up to five variants.
- Pages, words and records
- Seven images, one listing copy set, three logo exports.
- Formats
- Retailer-required JPG/PNG dimensions confirmed at start; copy in DOCX/CSV.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute SKU/specification intake and one 30-minute proof review.
- Client inputs
- Product facts/specs, retailer category, SKU/variant matrix, trademark assets and cleared product photos.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for walmart / amazon retailer asset pack — one sku group.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Photography, seller-account applications, retailer fees, translation and compliance/approval guarantees are excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Print on Demand Integration — Three ProductsPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingPrint on Demand Integration — Three Products$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 POD vendor setup: Connect one client-owned Printful, Printify or Gelato account to one supported existing store.
- 3 configured products: First three products configured with supplied artwork, proposed maximum five variants each, mockups, price fields and mapping.
- 1 integration verification: Sandbox/draft checkout and order-routing inspection with no paid order; document any physical paid-test requirement for separate authorization.
- 1 handoff guide: Up to six pages describing artwork changes, product sync and order troubleshooting.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One POD vendor, one existing store, three products and 15 total variants.
- Pages, words and records
- Three configured products; one routing test and six-page guide.
- Formats
- Provider art specifications; store product images; PDF handoff and test record.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute integration kickoff and one 45-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Client-owned store/vendor access, source artwork licenses, product selections, shipping policy and approved prices.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs, supported platform access and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for print on demand integration — three products.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Store rebuild, additional products, inventory/returns management and production/shipping charges are outside service labor.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPrint on Demand Integration — Three Products$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 POD vendor setup: Connect one client-owned Printful, Printify or Gelato account to one supported existing store.
- 3 configured products: First three products configured with supplied artwork, proposed maximum five variants each, mockups, price fields and mapping.
- 1 integration verification: Sandbox/draft checkout and order-routing inspection with no paid order; document any physical paid-test requirement for separate authorization.
- 1 handoff guide: Up to six pages describing artwork changes, product sync and order troubleshooting.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One POD vendor, one existing store, three products and 15 total variants.
- Pages, words and records
- Three configured products; one routing test and six-page guide.
- Formats
- Provider art specifications; store product images; PDF handoff and test record.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute integration kickoff and one 45-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Client-owned store/vendor access, source artwork licenses, product selections, shipping policy and approved prices.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs, supported platform access and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for print on demand integration — three products.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Store rebuild, additional products, inventory/returns management and production/shipping charges are outside service labor.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Catalog Design — 8 to 16 PagesPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingCatalog Design — 8 to 16 Pages$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 product/art catalog: One 8–16-page catalog, proposed maximum 40 entries, up to 4,000 supplied words and 50 supplied images; contents/grid and consistent item layout.
- 2 final catalog editions: One press-ready PDF and one linked screen PDF; both represent the same catalog, not additional page inventory.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand/catalog edition, one print format and one printer.
- Pages, words and records
- 8–16 total pages including covers;40 entries;4,000 words;50 images.
- Formats
- Press PDF and optimized screen PDF; US Letter or A4 chosen at kickoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute content/structure meeting and two 30-minute proof reviews.
- Client inputs
- Organized item spreadsheet, approved prices/specs, high-resolution photos, copy and printer specs.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for catalog design — 8 to 16 pages.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Printing, photography, data cleanup beyond supplied table, translation and extra pages require written quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingCatalog Design — 8 to 16 Pages$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 product/art catalog: One 8–16-page catalog, proposed maximum 40 entries, up to 4,000 supplied words and 50 supplied images; contents/grid and consistent item layout.
- 2 final catalog editions: One press-ready PDF and one linked screen PDF; both represent the same catalog, not additional page inventory.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand/catalog edition, one print format and one printer.
- Pages, words and records
- 8–16 total pages including covers;40 entries;4,000 words;50 images.
- Formats
- Press PDF and optimized screen PDF; US Letter or A4 chosen at kickoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute content/structure meeting and two 30-minute proof reviews.
- Client inputs
- Organized item spreadsheet, approved prices/specs, high-resolution photos, copy and printer specs.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for catalog design — 8 to 16 pages.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Printing, photography, data cleanup beyond supplied table, translation and extra pages require written quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Apparel Line for Artist or Band — 3 to 5 DesignsPrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingApparel Line for Artist or Band — 3 to 5 Designs$5,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 5 apparel design slots: Published scope 3–5 designs retained; final count within this range agreed before purchase, across T-shirts, hoodies or totes; one imprint surface per design.
- 1 production vendor setup: One POD or print vendor with agreed garment types and artwork specifications.
- 5 storefront product configurations: Up to five products on one existing Bandcamp or Shopify storefront, one per approved design, up to six variants each; supplied pricing and mockups.
- 1 production handoff: Design-file set, variant matrix and first-order checklist; no unapproved production purchase.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One artist/band, one production vendor, one existing storefront; up to five products/30 variants.
- Pages, words and records
- 3–5 original designs; one surface per design; five product configurations.
- Formats
- Vector PDF/SVG or 300 ppi PNG; provider mockups; product matrix CSV.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute creative/production kickoff and two 30-minute reviews.
- Client inputs
- Artist marks/references, merchandise rights, garment choices, vendor/store access, size/color choices and price approvals.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 20 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for apparel line for artist or band — 3 to 5 designs.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Extra designs/surfaces, store rebuild, physical inventory/fulfillment and unquoted print units require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingApparel Line for Artist or Band — 3 to 5 Designs$5,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 5 apparel design slots: Published scope 3–5 designs retained; final count within this range agreed before purchase, across T-shirts, hoodies or totes; one imprint surface per design.
- 1 production vendor setup: One POD or print vendor with agreed garment types and artwork specifications.
- 5 storefront product configurations: Up to five products on one existing Bandcamp or Shopify storefront, one per approved design, up to six variants each; supplied pricing and mockups.
- 1 production handoff: Design-file set, variant matrix and first-order checklist; no unapproved production purchase.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One artist/band, one production vendor, one existing storefront; up to five products/30 variants.
- Pages, words and records
- 3–5 original designs; one surface per design; five product configurations.
- Formats
- Vector PDF/SVG or 300 ppi PNG; provider mockups; product matrix CSV.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute creative/production kickoff and two 30-minute reviews.
- Client inputs
- Artist marks/references, merchandise rights, garment choices, vendor/store access, size/color choices and price approvals.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 20 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for apparel line for artist or band — 3 to 5 designs.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Extra designs/surfaces, store rebuild, physical inventory/fulfillment and unquoted print units require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $5,500 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Catalog Design — 20 to 32 Pages, Custom ScopePrint & MerchandiseIncluded scope and billingCatalog Design — 20 to 32 Pages, Custom Scope$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 large catalog: Proposed new-order base 20–32 pages including covers, up to 100 entries,8,000 supplied words and 120 supplied images; larger editions individually scoped.
- 1 image direction and curation pass: Select and sequence up to 120 client-provided images; one image register noting crops and resolution issues.
- 2 final catalog editions: One print-ready PDF and one linked screen PDF at one chosen page size.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand/catalog edition, one chosen page size and one print vendor.
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed 20–32-page base;100 entries;8,000 words;120 images. Original 20+ scope retained as open custom quote for larger editions.
- Formats
- Press PDF and optimized screen PDF; US Letter or A4.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute structure workshop and two 45-minute proof reviews.
- Client inputs
- Organized product/art records, cleared high-resolution images, copy/price approvals and printer specifications.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 25 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start for the proposed 32-page maximum.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for catalog design — 20 to 32 pages, custom scope.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Pages above the accepted count, printing, original photography and extensive product-data reconstruction require written quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingCatalog Design — 20 to 32 Pages, Custom Scope$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 large catalog: Proposed new-order base 20–32 pages including covers, up to 100 entries,8,000 supplied words and 120 supplied images; larger editions individually scoped.
- 1 image direction and curation pass: Select and sequence up to 120 client-provided images; one image register noting crops and resolution issues.
- 2 final catalog editions: One print-ready PDF and one linked screen PDF at one chosen page size.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand/catalog edition, one chosen page size and one print vendor.
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed 20–32-page base;100 entries;8,000 words;120 images. Original 20+ scope retained as open custom quote for larger editions.
- Formats
- Press PDF and optimized screen PDF; US Letter or A4.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute structure workshop and two 45-minute proof reviews.
- Client inputs
- Organized product/art records, cleared high-resolution images, copy/price approvals and printer specifications.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 25 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start for the proposed 32-page maximum.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
- Approve the working proof for catalog design — 20 to 32 pages, custom scope.
- Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
- Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.
Separate costs and exclusions- Pages above the accepted count, printing, original photography and extensive product-data reconstruction require written quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $8,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Calendly / Booking System SetupBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingCalendly / Booking System Setup$875 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 booking account configuration: One client-owned Calendly or Acuity account, one staff calendar, availability/timezone/buffers and cancellation text supplied by client.
- 3 meeting types: Up to three types with duration, location, intake fields and confirmation/reminder settings.
- 1 website embed: One booking embed or link on one existing page with desktop/mobile verification.
- 1 handoff: One concise configuration sheet and three controlled test bookings, cancelled after verification.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One booking account, one staff calendar and one existing website.
- Pages, words and records
- Three meeting types; up to five intake fields per type; one page embed.
- Formats
- Native booking configuration; PDF settings checklist.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute availability intake and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Calendar access, timezone, meeting durations, availability, policies and existing site access.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Three business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; preserves store’s three-day setup target.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated review round from current addendum; corrections to agreed configuration separate from new meeting types.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for calendly / booking system setup.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Multiple staff calendars, payment collection, custom routing and ongoing scheduling service require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingCalendly / Booking System Setup$875 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 booking account configuration: One client-owned Calendly or Acuity account, one staff calendar, availability/timezone/buffers and cancellation text supplied by client.
- 3 meeting types: Up to three types with duration, location, intake fields and confirmation/reminder settings.
- 1 website embed: One booking embed or link on one existing page with desktop/mobile verification.
- 1 handoff: One concise configuration sheet and three controlled test bookings, cancelled after verification.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One booking account, one staff calendar and one existing website.
- Pages, words and records
- Three meeting types; up to five intake fields per type; one page embed.
- Formats
- Native booking configuration; PDF settings checklist.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute availability intake and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Calendar access, timezone, meeting durations, availability, policies and existing site access.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Three business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; preserves store’s three-day setup target.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated review round from current addendum; corrections to agreed configuration separate from new meeting types.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for calendly / booking system setup.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Multiple staff calendars, payment collection, custom routing and ongoing scheduling service require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $875 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Email Forwarding + Custom Domain EmailBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingEmail Forwarding + Custom Domain Email$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 domain mail-routing configuration: One authoritative DNS zone: document existing MX, configure approved forwarding provider and preserve existing records not in scope.
- 3 forwarding aliases: Proposed maximum three custom-domain addresses forwarding to one verified existing destination inbox.
- 1 sender-authentication check: Review SPF and configure supported DKIM for the selected sending service; document DMARC status and delivery test results. Forwarding alone does not establish outbound authenticated sending.
- 1 handoff record: DNS change list, rollback values and secure ownership/access record in the client account spreadsheet.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One domain, one forwarding provider, one destination mailbox; up to three aliases.
- Pages, words and records
- One DNS zone and three delivery tests; no mailbox migration.
- Formats
- DNS record inventory and PDF setup/rollback notes.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute routing review and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Registrar/DNS authorization, existing MX/provider details, destination inbox verification and outbound-sender requirements.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; provider/DNS propagation dependency documented.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated configuration review; corrective DNS changes are distinguished from changing mail architecture.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for email forwarding + custom domain email.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Full mailbox hosting, historical-mail migration, multiple domains and unsupported outbound sending require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingEmail Forwarding + Custom Domain Email$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 domain mail-routing configuration: One authoritative DNS zone: document existing MX, configure approved forwarding provider and preserve existing records not in scope.
- 3 forwarding aliases: Proposed maximum three custom-domain addresses forwarding to one verified existing destination inbox.
- 1 sender-authentication check: Review SPF and configure supported DKIM for the selected sending service; document DMARC status and delivery test results. Forwarding alone does not establish outbound authenticated sending.
- 1 handoff record: DNS change list, rollback values and secure ownership/access record in the client account spreadsheet.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One domain, one forwarding provider, one destination mailbox; up to three aliases.
- Pages, words and records
- One DNS zone and three delivery tests; no mailbox migration.
- Formats
- DNS record inventory and PDF setup/rollback notes.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute routing review and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Registrar/DNS authorization, existing MX/provider details, destination inbox verification and outbound-sender requirements.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; provider/DNS propagation dependency documented.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated configuration review; corrective DNS changes are distinguished from changing mail architecture.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for email forwarding + custom domain email.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Full mailbox hosting, historical-mail migration, multiple domains and unsupported outbound sending require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Zapier Automation, Single WorkflowBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingZapier Automation, Single Workflow$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 multi-step Zap: One trigger, up to four action steps and one filter/path; connect up to three client-owned apps.
- 1 workflow documentation: Trigger/action map, field mapping, credentials ownership references and failure/retry guidance, up to six pages.
- 10 test cases: Up to 10 accepted test records covering normal, missing-field and duplicate inputs without live customer messages.
- 4 first-month monitoring checks: One scheduled check per week for the first four weeks, error-log review and corrections against the accepted workflow.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One Zapier workspace, one Zap and up to three app accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- Four action steps, one branch/filter,10 tests; four weekly monitoring checks.
- Formats
- Native Zap; PDF diagram/settings; sample CSV test records.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute process intake and one 45-minute acceptance/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Authorized app access, field schema, sample records, trigger rules and data/privacy approvals.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start for build; first-month monitoring follows acceptance.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for zapier automation, single workflow.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional workflows, historical data backfill, round-the-clock monitoring and paid-app charges require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingZapier Automation, Single Workflow$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 multi-step Zap: One trigger, up to four action steps and one filter/path; connect up to three client-owned apps.
- 1 workflow documentation: Trigger/action map, field mapping, credentials ownership references and failure/retry guidance, up to six pages.
- 10 test cases: Up to 10 accepted test records covering normal, missing-field and duplicate inputs without live customer messages.
- 4 first-month monitoring checks: One scheduled check per week for the first four weeks, error-log review and corrections against the accepted workflow.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One Zapier workspace, one Zap and up to three app accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- Four action steps, one branch/filter,10 tests; four weekly monitoring checks.
- Formats
- Native Zap; PDF diagram/settings; sample CSV test records.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute process intake and one 45-minute acceptance/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Authorized app access, field schema, sample records, trigger rules and data/privacy approvals.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start for build; first-month monitoring follows acceptance.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for zapier automation, single workflow.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional workflows, historical data backfill, round-the-clock monitoring and paid-app charges require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Google Workspace Setup — Up to Five UsersBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingGoogle Workspace Setup — Up to Five Users$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 Workspace tenant/domain setup: Verify one client-owned domain and provision selected Workspace plan; configure authorized MX and authentication records without disrupting unrelated DNS.
- 5 user account setups: Up to five licensed users, secure invitation/recovery ownership and basic mail/calendar access checks; credentials recorded privately where available.
- 3 mail forwarding/group configurations: Proposed maximum three routing aliases/groups with membership and owner documented.
- 1 calendar and Drive structure: One shared calendar and up to five shared folders or supported shared-drive areas with an access matrix.
- 1 administrator handoff: One setup checklist, DNS rollback record, ownership record and client admin walkthrough.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One Workspace organization/domain; up to five licensed users.
- Pages, words and records
- Five users; three groups/aliases; five shared storage areas and one calendar.
- Formats
- Native Workspace configuration; access matrix XLSX/PDF.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute requirements meeting and one 60-minute admin handoff.
- Client inputs
- Domain/DNS authorization, chosen paid plan, five-user roster, recovery/admin owner, desired groups and existing mail architecture.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs, licensing availability and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for google workspace setup — up to five users.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Mailbox migration, device management, advanced retention/e-discovery, multiple domains and additional users require written scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingGoogle Workspace Setup — Up to Five Users$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 Workspace tenant/domain setup: Verify one client-owned domain and provision selected Workspace plan; configure authorized MX and authentication records without disrupting unrelated DNS.
- 5 user account setups: Up to five licensed users, secure invitation/recovery ownership and basic mail/calendar access checks; credentials recorded privately where available.
- 3 mail forwarding/group configurations: Proposed maximum three routing aliases/groups with membership and owner documented.
- 1 calendar and Drive structure: One shared calendar and up to five shared folders or supported shared-drive areas with an access matrix.
- 1 administrator handoff: One setup checklist, DNS rollback record, ownership record and client admin walkthrough.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One Workspace organization/domain; up to five licensed users.
- Pages, words and records
- Five users; three groups/aliases; five shared storage areas and one calendar.
- Formats
- Native Workspace configuration; access matrix XLSX/PDF.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute requirements meeting and one 60-minute admin handoff.
- Client inputs
- Domain/DNS authorization, chosen paid plan, five-user roster, recovery/admin owner, desired groups and existing mail architecture.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs, licensing availability and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for google workspace setup — up to five users.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Mailbox migration, device management, advanced retention/e-discovery, multiple domains and additional users require written scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Reservation System SetupBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingReservation System Setup$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 reservation platform setup: One OpenTable, Resy or Tock account/location with client-approved service hours, booking rules and guest messages.
- 1 floorplan and table configuration: Proposed maximum 30 tables, three seating zones and two recurring service periods.
- 1 website reservation integration: One native widget/link on one existing website page.
- 6 reservation test scenarios: Create/cancel controlled test records covering party sizes, availability, blocked time and confirmation rules; no paid reservations.
- 1 operator handoff: One staff guide up to eight pages and role/access checklist.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One restaurant/venue location, one reservation platform and one website.
- Pages, words and records
- 30 tables; three zones; two service periods; six tests.
- Formats
- Native configuration, floorplan reference and PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute floorplan/service meeting and one 60-minute staff handoff.
- Client inputs
- Measured floorplan, capacities, service hours, reservation policies, authorized platform/site access and approving manager.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs, provider onboarding and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated review round as in current addendum; correction versus altered service policy distinguished.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for reservation system setup.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Floorplan surveying, staffing operations, paid guest deposits, multi-location rollout and provider approval guarantees excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingReservation System Setup$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 reservation platform setup: One OpenTable, Resy or Tock account/location with client-approved service hours, booking rules and guest messages.
- 1 floorplan and table configuration: Proposed maximum 30 tables, three seating zones and two recurring service periods.
- 1 website reservation integration: One native widget/link on one existing website page.
- 6 reservation test scenarios: Create/cancel controlled test records covering party sizes, availability, blocked time and confirmation rules; no paid reservations.
- 1 operator handoff: One staff guide up to eight pages and role/access checklist.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One restaurant/venue location, one reservation platform and one website.
- Pages, words and records
- 30 tables; three zones; two service periods; six tests.
- Formats
- Native configuration, floorplan reference and PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute floorplan/service meeting and one 60-minute staff handoff.
- Client inputs
- Measured floorplan, capacities, service hours, reservation policies, authorized platform/site access and approving manager.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs, provider onboarding and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated review round as in current addendum; correction versus altered service policy distinguished.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for reservation system setup.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Floorplan surveying, staffing operations, paid guest deposits, multi-location rollout and provider approval guarantees excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Document Automation — Up to Three TemplatesBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingDocument Automation — Up to Three Templates$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 3 automated document templates: Up to three client-supplied templates, maximum 10 pages and 25 merge fields each, in PandaDoc, Documint or agreed equivalent.
- 1 data-to-document workflow: One source table/form mapped to approved fields; up to two conditional sections per template.
- 1 signature integration: One existing e-signature provider connected where supported and needed, with up to two signer roles.
- 9 template acceptance tests: Three populated test documents per template, using nonproduction sample data, plus mapping/handoff guide.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One document platform, one data source, one signature provider.
- Pages, words and records
- Three templates;30 pages total;75 fields total; two signer roles.
- Formats
- Native templates, PDF output, field-mapping CSV.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute template workshop and one 60-minute acceptance/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Counsel/client-approved source documents, field definitions, sample data, signer order and authorized platform accounts.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for document automation — up to three templates.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal drafting, additional data sources, custom enterprise SSO and unapproved signature sends are separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingDocument Automation — Up to Three Templates$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 3 automated document templates: Up to three client-supplied templates, maximum 10 pages and 25 merge fields each, in PandaDoc, Documint or agreed equivalent.
- 1 data-to-document workflow: One source table/form mapped to approved fields; up to two conditional sections per template.
- 1 signature integration: One existing e-signature provider connected where supported and needed, with up to two signer roles.
- 9 template acceptance tests: Three populated test documents per template, using nonproduction sample data, plus mapping/handoff guide.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One document platform, one data source, one signature provider.
- Pages, words and records
- Three templates;30 pages total;75 fields total; two signer roles.
- Formats
- Native templates, PDF output, field-mapping CSV.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute template workshop and one 60-minute acceptance/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Counsel/client-approved source documents, field definitions, sample data, signer order and authorized platform accounts.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for document automation — up to three templates.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal drafting, additional data sources, custom enterprise SSO and unapproved signature sends are separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Make.com / N 8 n Custom Automation — Scoped WorkflowBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingMake.com / N 8 n Custom Automation — Scoped Workflow$3,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 automation scoping specification: Document one business process, up to four connected apps, normal/failure paths, data mappings and acceptance checks.
- 1 custom workflow build: Proposed base up to 12 nodes/steps, three branches and one webhook; up to two short custom-code transforms of 100 lines each.
- 15 acceptance test cases: Sample-data tests covering validation, retries, deduplication and error reporting.
- 1 operations handoff: Diagram, environment/configuration list and operating guide up to 10 pages; owner-controlled credentials.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One Make organization or one existing n 8 n instance, four apps and one workflow.
- Pages, words and records
- 12 steps; three branches; one webhook; two code transforms;15 tests.
- Formats
- Native workflow export/JSON where supported; PDF documentation; test CSV.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute scoping session and two 45-minute review/handoff sessions.
- Client inputs
- Current process map, supported app/API access, sample inputs, security requirements and expected run volumes.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 3–6 business weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start; accepted scope fixes dependencies and release date.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for make.com / n 8 n custom automation — scoped workflow.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- New enterprise infrastructure, unrestricted custom software, multiple workflows and ongoing uptime operations require separate quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMake.com / N 8 n Custom Automation — Scoped Workflow$3,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 automation scoping specification: Document one business process, up to four connected apps, normal/failure paths, data mappings and acceptance checks.
- 1 custom workflow build: Proposed base up to 12 nodes/steps, three branches and one webhook; up to two short custom-code transforms of 100 lines each.
- 15 acceptance test cases: Sample-data tests covering validation, retries, deduplication and error reporting.
- 1 operations handoff: Diagram, environment/configuration list and operating guide up to 10 pages; owner-controlled credentials.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One Make organization or one existing n 8 n instance, four apps and one workflow.
- Pages, words and records
- 12 steps; three branches; one webhook; two code transforms;15 tests.
- Formats
- Native workflow export/JSON where supported; PDF documentation; test CSV.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute scoping session and two 45-minute review/handoff sessions.
- Client inputs
- Current process map, supported app/API access, sample inputs, security requirements and expected run volumes.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 3–6 business weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start; accepted scope fixes dependencies and release date.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for make.com / n 8 n custom automation — scoped workflow.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- New enterprise infrastructure, unrestricted custom software, multiple workflows and ongoing uptime operations require separate quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
CRM SetupBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingCRM Setup$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 CRM workspace configuration: One HubSpot, Pipedrive or Notion CRM workspace; up to five users with agreed roles.
- 1 sales pipeline: Up to eight stages and 15 custom fields with owner/next-action rules.
- 3 automation rules: Up to three native rules for assignment, reminders or stage changes.
- 1 existing-contact migration: One validated CSV import of up to 1,000 contact records, one field mapping and duplicate check; client supplies lawful data.
- 1 handoff and acceptance: 10 test records and one guide covering import, pipeline upkeep and reports.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One CRM workspace; five users; one pipeline and one CSV source.
- Pages, words and records
- 1,000 contacts;15 fields; eight stages; three rules.
- Formats
- Native CRM; CSV mapping and PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute sales-process workshop and one 60-minute team training.
- Client inputs
- Clean contact export, approved pipeline stages, user roster, field definitions and client-owned platform access.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for crm setup.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Enterprise implementation, multiple pipelines, custom integrations, extensive data repair and records above accepted cap require scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingCRM Setup$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 CRM workspace configuration: One HubSpot, Pipedrive or Notion CRM workspace; up to five users with agreed roles.
- 1 sales pipeline: Up to eight stages and 15 custom fields with owner/next-action rules.
- 3 automation rules: Up to three native rules for assignment, reminders or stage changes.
- 1 existing-contact migration: One validated CSV import of up to 1,000 contact records, one field mapping and duplicate check; client supplies lawful data.
- 1 handoff and acceptance: 10 test records and one guide covering import, pipeline upkeep and reports.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One CRM workspace; five users; one pipeline and one CSV source.
- Pages, words and records
- 1,000 contacts;15 fields; eight stages; three rules.
- Formats
- Native CRM; CSV mapping and PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute sales-process workshop and one 60-minute team training.
- Client inputs
- Clean contact export, approved pipeline stages, user roster, field definitions and client-owned platform access.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for crm setup.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Enterprise implementation, multiple pipelines, custom integrations, extensive data repair and records above accepted cap require scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Intake Form to CRM PipelineBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingIntake Form to CRM Pipeline$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 website intake form: One form with up to 15 fields, required-field validation, consent text supplied/approved by client and spam-control configuration.
- 1 CRM record integration: Map one form to one CRM pipeline; create/update records with duplicate handling and source attribution.
- 1 internal notification: One Slack channel or one internal email destination receives approved submission summary.
- 1 automatic acknowledgement: One client-approved auto-reply up to 200 words, with recipient validation and test mode.
- 3 follow-up messages: Three distinct messages up to 200 words each; client-approved timing, suppression and stop conditions.
- 10 acceptance tests: Normal, incomplete, duplicate and opt-out/stop-path records, with guide and ownership handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One website, one form, one CRM, one internal notification destination and one messaging platform.
- Pages, words and records
- 15 form fields; one acknowledgement plus three follow-ups;10 test records.
- Formats
- Native form/workflow; HTML/plain text messages; field mapping and PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute intake journey workshop and one 45-minute acceptance review.
- Client inputs
- Field definitions, CRM stages, lawful contact/use policy, approved messages/timing, access and named response owner.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs, approved copy and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated review round per current addendum; errors against approved mapping corrected separately from new routing.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for intake form to crm pipeline.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional forms/pipelines, inbound human sales support, purchased contact lists and live bulk sending are outside build scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingIntake Form to CRM Pipeline$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 website intake form: One form with up to 15 fields, required-field validation, consent text supplied/approved by client and spam-control configuration.
- 1 CRM record integration: Map one form to one CRM pipeline; create/update records with duplicate handling and source attribution.
- 1 internal notification: One Slack channel or one internal email destination receives approved submission summary.
- 1 automatic acknowledgement: One client-approved auto-reply up to 200 words, with recipient validation and test mode.
- 3 follow-up messages: Three distinct messages up to 200 words each; client-approved timing, suppression and stop conditions.
- 10 acceptance tests: Normal, incomplete, duplicate and opt-out/stop-path records, with guide and ownership handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One website, one form, one CRM, one internal notification destination and one messaging platform.
- Pages, words and records
- 15 form fields; one acknowledgement plus three follow-ups;10 test records.
- Formats
- Native form/workflow; HTML/plain text messages; field mapping and PDF guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute intake journey workshop and one 45-minute acceptance review.
- Client inputs
- Field definitions, CRM stages, lawful contact/use policy, approved messages/timing, access and named response owner.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs, approved copy and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated review round per current addendum; errors against approved mapping corrected separately from new routing.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for intake form to crm pipeline.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional forms/pipelines, inbound human sales support, purchased contact lists and live bulk sending are outside build scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Online Ordering IntegrationBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingOnline Ordering Integration$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 online ordering platform configuration: One ChowNow, Toast, Square Online or agreed supported account/location with client-approved business and fulfillment settings.
- 1 menu and pricing build: Up to 60 items,10 categories and 30 modifier groups from a client-approved menu table.
- 1 website ordering integration: One ordering link/widget or supported native embed on one existing site.
- 1 supported POS synchronization: Connect one compatible existing POS where applicable; verify 10 sample SKU/price mappings and document unsupported fields.
- 8 ordering acceptance scenarios: Use sandbox/draft orders for pickup windows, modifiers, unavailable items and tax/shipping settings supplied by client; no real charge.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One ordering platform, one venue, one POS and one website.
- Pages, words and records
- 60 items;10 categories;30 modifier groups; eight test scenarios.
- Formats
- Native menu configuration; mapping CSV; PDF operator notes.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute ordering/menu workshop and one 60-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Approved menu/prices/modifiers, operating hours, fulfillment policies, provider/POS access and tax settings from client adviser.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs, provider readiness and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated review round as current addendum specifies; correction of approved menu settings separate from menu redesign.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for online ordering integration.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- POS hardware, food photography, accounting/tax advice, additional locations and paid test orders require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingOnline Ordering Integration$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 online ordering platform configuration: One ChowNow, Toast, Square Online or agreed supported account/location with client-approved business and fulfillment settings.
- 1 menu and pricing build: Up to 60 items,10 categories and 30 modifier groups from a client-approved menu table.
- 1 website ordering integration: One ordering link/widget or supported native embed on one existing site.
- 1 supported POS synchronization: Connect one compatible existing POS where applicable; verify 10 sample SKU/price mappings and document unsupported fields.
- 8 ordering acceptance scenarios: Use sandbox/draft orders for pickup windows, modifiers, unavailable items and tax/shipping settings supplied by client; no real charge.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One ordering platform, one venue, one POS and one website.
- Pages, words and records
- 60 items;10 categories;30 modifier groups; eight test scenarios.
- Formats
- Native menu configuration; mapping CSV; PDF operator notes.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute ordering/menu workshop and one 60-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Approved menu/prices/modifiers, operating hours, fulfillment policies, provider/POS access and tax settings from client adviser.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs, provider readiness and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated review round as current addendum specifies; correction of approved menu settings separate from menu redesign.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for online ordering integration.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- POS hardware, food photography, accounting/tax advice, additional locations and paid test orders require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Zapier Automation Pack — Five WorkflowsBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingZapier Automation Pack — Five Workflows$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 5 multi-step Zaps: Exactly five workflows selected at kickoff; each one trigger, up to four actions and one filter/path; up to five shared app accounts across the pack.
- 5 workflow documentation sets: One diagram, field map and failure/retry note per Zap; consolidated administrator guide.
- 30 acceptance test cases: Six test records per workflow, including failed validation and duplicate handling.
- 4 first-month monitoring checks: Weekly inspection of all five workflows for four weeks; correct failures against the accepted design.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One Zapier workspace, five Zaps and up to five connected app accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- Five workflows;20 actions total; five branches;30 tests.
- Formats
- Native Zaps; PDF diagrams/guide; sample CSV.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute prioritization workshop and one 60-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Ranked five use cases, authorized app access, field mappings, sample data and expected volumes.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; four monitoring weeks follow acceptance.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for zapier automation pack — five workflows.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Sixth workflow, historical backfills, complex custom API code and continuous support require written scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingZapier Automation Pack — Five Workflows$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 5 multi-step Zaps: Exactly five workflows selected at kickoff; each one trigger, up to four actions and one filter/path; up to five shared app accounts across the pack.
- 5 workflow documentation sets: One diagram, field map and failure/retry note per Zap; consolidated administrator guide.
- 30 acceptance test cases: Six test records per workflow, including failed validation and duplicate handling.
- 4 first-month monitoring checks: Weekly inspection of all five workflows for four weeks; correct failures against the accepted design.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One Zapier workspace, five Zaps and up to five connected app accounts.
- Pages, words and records
- Five workflows;20 actions total; five branches;30 tests.
- Formats
- Native Zaps; PDF diagrams/guide; sample CSV.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute prioritization workshop and one 60-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Ranked five use cases, authorized app access, field mappings, sample data and expected volumes.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; four monitoring weeks follow acceptance.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for zapier automation pack — five workflows.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Sixth workflow, historical backfills, complex custom API code and continuous support require written scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $4,500 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Phone / SMS Automation — TwilioBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingPhone / SMS Automation — Twilio$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 client-owned Twilio setup: One project/account and one phone number subject to provider availability and registration requirements.
- 1 routing map: Up to three destination contacts and two routing branches for the agreed intake/notification purpose.
- 1 SMS automation flow: Up to six approved message templates of 320 characters each, opt-out/stop handling and one inbound data destination.
- 12 test scenarios: Nonproduction verification of delivery, routing, missing inputs, replies and stop requests; document provider errors.
- 1 operator guide: Configuration, usage controls, number ownership and incident/escalation notes up to 10 pages.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One Twilio account, one number, one workflow, three destinations and one data integration.
- Pages, words and records
- Six templates; two branches;12 tests; production message volume fixed in accepted usage allowance.
- Formats
- SMS/plaintext templates; native workflow; PDF configuration and test log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute routing/consent workshop and one 60-minute acceptance/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Business registration data supplied directly to provider, approved message/consent text, authorized account access, routing roster and expected send volume.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; provider registration/number approval dates remain an explicit dependency.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for phone / sms automation — twilio.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Voice call center,24/7 human response, unsolicited campaigns, legal compliance certification and provider approval guarantees excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPhone / SMS Automation — Twilio$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 client-owned Twilio setup: One project/account and one phone number subject to provider availability and registration requirements.
- 1 routing map: Up to three destination contacts and two routing branches for the agreed intake/notification purpose.
- 1 SMS automation flow: Up to six approved message templates of 320 characters each, opt-out/stop handling and one inbound data destination.
- 12 test scenarios: Nonproduction verification of delivery, routing, missing inputs, replies and stop requests; document provider errors.
- 1 operator guide: Configuration, usage controls, number ownership and incident/escalation notes up to 10 pages.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One Twilio account, one number, one workflow, three destinations and one data integration.
- Pages, words and records
- Six templates; two branches;12 tests; production message volume fixed in accepted usage allowance.
- Formats
- SMS/plaintext templates; native workflow; PDF configuration and test log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute routing/consent workshop and one 60-minute acceptance/handoff.
- Client inputs
- Business registration data supplied directly to provider, approved message/consent text, authorized account access, routing roster and expected send volume.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; provider registration/number approval dates remain an explicit dependency.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for phone / sms automation — twilio.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Voice call center,24/7 human response, unsolicited campaigns, legal compliance certification and provider approval guarantees excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $4,500 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Inventory or Order Management — Custom ScopeBusiness OperationsIncluded scope and billingInventory or Order Management — Custom Scope$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 platform selection and setup: Evaluate up to three supported options against one agreed inventory/order process; configure one selected client-owned account.
- 1 initial inventory import: One CSV import of up to 500 SKUs across up to two storage locations; mapping and duplicate/unit checks.
- 3 inventory alert rules: Low-stock alert, supplier reorder reminder and one exception rule, with up to five notification recipients.
- 1 order status workflow: One existing order-source connection where supported, up to six statuses and one reconciliation report.
- 15 acceptance test records: Validate stock movement, low-stock thresholds, cancelled orders and duplicate imports; guide and handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One inventory platform, one order source, two storage locations and five users.
- Pages, words and records
- 500 SKUs; six order statuses; three alert rules;15 tests.
- Formats
- Native system setup; import/mapping CSV; PDF operating guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute process workshop and two 45-minute review/training sessions.
- Client inputs
- Current inventory CSV, unit definitions, location/supplier lists, reorder thresholds, permissions and supported order-system access.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 20 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; final written scope reflects source-data condition.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for inventory or order management — custom scope.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Warehouse operations, physical stock counting, enterprise ERP migration, hardware and accounting integration beyond one connection require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingInventory or Order Management — Custom Scope$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 platform selection and setup: Evaluate up to three supported options against one agreed inventory/order process; configure one selected client-owned account.
- 1 initial inventory import: One CSV import of up to 500 SKUs across up to two storage locations; mapping and duplicate/unit checks.
- 3 inventory alert rules: Low-stock alert, supplier reorder reminder and one exception rule, with up to five notification recipients.
- 1 order status workflow: One existing order-source connection where supported, up to six statuses and one reconciliation report.
- 15 acceptance test records: Validate stock movement, low-stock thresholds, cancelled orders and duplicate imports; guide and handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One inventory platform, one order source, two storage locations and five users.
- Pages, words and records
- 500 SKUs; six order statuses; three alert rules;15 tests.
- Formats
- Native system setup; import/mapping CSV; PDF operating guide.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute process workshop and two 45-minute review/training sessions.
- Client inputs
- Current inventory CSV, unit definitions, location/supplier lists, reorder thresholds, permissions and supported order-system access.
- Approval
- One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
- Delivery
- 20 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; final written scope reflects source-data condition.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
- Approve configuration map for inventory or order management — custom scope.
- Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
- Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.
Separate costs and exclusions- Warehouse operations, physical stock counting, enterprise ERP migration, hardware and accounting integration beyond one connection require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Attorney BioLaw Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingAttorney Bio$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 long attorney biography: One 500–700-word biography with verified supplied education, admissions, roles and experience.
- 1 short attorney biography: One 150–250-word derivative for speaking/profile use.
- 1 qualification/source checklist: A factual approval list covering titles, jurisdictions, dates, awards and claims; unresolved items identified.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One attorney and one firm.
- Pages, words and records
- Long 700 words maximum; short 250 words; one interview.
- Formats
- DOCX with tracked revisions and clean PDF.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute attorney interview and one 20-minute approval review.
- Client inputs
- CurrentCV, firm positioning, verified qualifications, headshot rights and preferred pronouns/name.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Up to two consolidated revision rounds retained from current store; correction of approved facts separate from a new positioning direction.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for attorney bio.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional attorneys, resume drafting, publishing and legal verification beyond supplied evidence require scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingAttorney Bio$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 long attorney biography: One 500–700-word biography with verified supplied education, admissions, roles and experience.
- 1 short attorney biography: One 150–250-word derivative for speaking/profile use.
- 1 qualification/source checklist: A factual approval list covering titles, jurisdictions, dates, awards and claims; unresolved items identified.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One attorney and one firm.
- Pages, words and records
- Long 700 words maximum; short 250 words; one interview.
- Formats
- DOCX with tracked revisions and clean PDF.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute attorney interview and one 20-minute approval review.
- Client inputs
- CurrentCV, firm positioning, verified qualifications, headshot rights and preferred pronouns/name.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Up to two consolidated revision rounds retained from current store; correction of approved facts separate from a new positioning direction.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for attorney bio.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional attorneys, resume drafting, publishing and legal verification beyond supplied evidence require scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Domain Forwarding for Multiple Practice URLs — Up to TenLaw Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingDomain Forwarding for Multiple Practice URLs — Up to Ten$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 10 domain forwarding configurations: Up to 10 client-owned domains routed to 10 approved existing destination URLs; configure supported HTTPS redirects and preserve unrelated mail/DNS records.
- 1 domain/redirect register: For each domain: current registrar/DNS, target, redirect behavior and certificate/hosting dependency.
- 20 redirect checks: HTTP and HTTPS tests for each of 10 domains, including destination and loop detection.
- 1 rollback/handoff package: Before/after DNS/redirect record and secure account-ownership notes.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Up to 10 domains; one destination site; supported registrar/hosting redirect methods.
- Pages, words and records
- 10 redirects;20 checks; one change register.
- Formats
- DNS/redirect CSV and PDF test/rollback record.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute domain inventory review and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Authorized registrar/DNS/hosting access,10 domain names, approved destination mapping and mail-service record inventory.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; DNS/certificate dependencies tracked.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for domain forwarding for multiple practice urls — up to ten.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Domain purchases, site migrations, backlink repair, ranking guarantees and unrelated email changes excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingDomain Forwarding for Multiple Practice URLs — Up to Ten$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 10 domain forwarding configurations: Up to 10 client-owned domains routed to 10 approved existing destination URLs; configure supported HTTPS redirects and preserve unrelated mail/DNS records.
- 1 domain/redirect register: For each domain: current registrar/DNS, target, redirect behavior and certificate/hosting dependency.
- 20 redirect checks: HTTP and HTTPS tests for each of 10 domains, including destination and loop detection.
- 1 rollback/handoff package: Before/after DNS/redirect record and secure account-ownership notes.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Up to 10 domains; one destination site; supported registrar/hosting redirect methods.
- Pages, words and records
- 10 redirects;20 checks; one change register.
- Formats
- DNS/redirect CSV and PDF test/rollback record.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute domain inventory review and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Authorized registrar/DNS/hosting access,10 domain names, approved destination mapping and mail-service record inventory.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; DNS/certificate dependencies tracked.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for domain forwarding for multiple practice urls — up to ten.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Domain purchases, site migrations, backlink repair, ranking guarantees and unrelated email changes excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Practice Area Page — Law FirmLaw Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingPractice Area Page — Law Firm$1,400 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 practice area page: One 800–1,200-word page for one practice area, with title/meta description, headings, service/process explanation and intakeCTA.
- 1 claims and terminology review: Check consistency of client-supplied legal facts, qualifications and disclaimers; attorney resolves legal accuracy.
- 1 existing-site publication: Publish one approved page into one existing template, add up to three internal links and verify desktop/mobile display.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm, one practice area and one existing website template.
- Pages, words and records
- One page up to 1,200 words; up to five supplied reference sources; three internal links.
- Formats
- DOCX draft, clean PDF and one native CMS page.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute attorney interview and one 30-minute final review.
- Client inputs
- Practice description, approved claims/disclaimers, sources, intake routing and authorized CMS access.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, with publication following attorney approval.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for practice area page — law firm.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- New website layout, additional practice areas, Bar filing/fees, legal opinions and guaranteed compliance excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPractice Area Page — Law Firm$1,400 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 practice area page: One 800–1,200-word page for one practice area, with title/meta description, headings, service/process explanation and intakeCTA.
- 1 claims and terminology review: Check consistency of client-supplied legal facts, qualifications and disclaimers; attorney resolves legal accuracy.
- 1 existing-site publication: Publish one approved page into one existing template, add up to three internal links and verify desktop/mobile display.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm, one practice area and one existing website template.
- Pages, words and records
- One page up to 1,200 words; up to five supplied reference sources; three internal links.
- Formats
- DOCX draft, clean PDF and one native CMS page.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute attorney interview and one 30-minute final review.
- Client inputs
- Practice description, approved claims/disclaimers, sources, intake routing and authorized CMS access.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, with publication following attorney approval.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for practice area page — law firm.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- New website layout, additional practice areas, Bar filing/fees, legal opinions and guaranteed compliance excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,400 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Firm About PageLaw Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingFirm About Page$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 firm About page: One 600–1,000-word page explaining firm history, approach, team structure and client service; title/meta/CTA included.
- 1 factual approval checklist: List source-dependent claims, affiliations, dates and client-service representations for attorney approval.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One law firm and one website page.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to 1,000 words; one firm interview; up to five source documents.
- Formats
- DOCX with tracked changes and clean PDF; publishing separately specified.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute firm interview and one 20-minute approval review.
- Client inputs
- Firm history, team roster, approved positioning, factual supporting records and preferred intakeCTA.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Up to two consolidated revision rounds as currently stated; changed firm positioning is new scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for firm about page.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Individual attorney biographies, website redesign, photography and independent legal opinion require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingFirm About Page$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 firm About page: One 600–1,000-word page explaining firm history, approach, team structure and client service; title/meta/CTA included.
- 1 factual approval checklist: List source-dependent claims, affiliations, dates and client-service representations for attorney approval.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One law firm and one website page.
- Pages, words and records
- Up to 1,000 words; one firm interview; up to five source documents.
- Formats
- DOCX with tracked changes and clean PDF; publishing separately specified.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute firm interview and one 20-minute approval review.
- Client inputs
- Firm history, team roster, approved positioning, factual supporting records and preferred intakeCTA.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Up to two consolidated revision rounds as currently stated; changed firm positioning is new scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for firm about page.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Individual attorney biographies, website redesign, photography and independent legal opinion require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
CLE / Speaker PromotionLaw Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingCLE / Speaker Promotion$2,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 speaker announcement package: One announcement up to 350 words, speaker bio excerpt up to 150 words and review of one supplied headshot for crop/resolution/rights.
- 2 original pre-event social concepts: Two announcement/reminder messages, each with up to 150 caption words and 1080 square/portrait exports; up to four placements on two firm accounts.
- 1 day-of social concept: One approved event-day message and image, adapted to two accounts; remote scheduled posting.
- 1 post-event recap: One 400–600-word recap using approved supplied notes plus one social excerpt up to 150 words.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One speaker/event, up to two social accounts and one firm website or email handoff.
- Pages, words and records
- Four original messages total: two pre-event, one day-of and one recap excerpt; up to eight placements if all approved.
- Formats
- JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350; DOCX/PDF copy; headshot crop.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute speaker briefing and one 30-minute copy review.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed event details, approved topic/title, registration link, headshot permissions, speaking bio and post-event notes.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- 15 business days across the accepted event schedule after complete inputs; recap within five business days after approved event notes arrive.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for cle / speaker promotion.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- CLE accreditation, headshot photography, onsite coverage, paid media and guaranteed attendance excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingCLE / Speaker Promotion$2,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 speaker announcement package: One announcement up to 350 words, speaker bio excerpt up to 150 words and review of one supplied headshot for crop/resolution/rights.
- 2 original pre-event social concepts: Two announcement/reminder messages, each with up to 150 caption words and 1080 square/portrait exports; up to four placements on two firm accounts.
- 1 day-of social concept: One approved event-day message and image, adapted to two accounts; remote scheduled posting.
- 1 post-event recap: One 400–600-word recap using approved supplied notes plus one social excerpt up to 150 words.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One speaker/event, up to two social accounts and one firm website or email handoff.
- Pages, words and records
- Four original messages total: two pre-event, one day-of and one recap excerpt; up to eight placements if all approved.
- Formats
- JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350; DOCX/PDF copy; headshot crop.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute speaker briefing and one 30-minute copy review.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed event details, approved topic/title, registration link, headshot permissions, speaking bio and post-event notes.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- 15 business days across the accepted event schedule after complete inputs; recap within five business days after approved event notes arrive.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for cle / speaker promotion.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- CLE accreditation, headshot photography, onsite coverage, paid media and guaranteed attendance excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Review Management Setup — Three PlatformsLaw Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingReview Management Setup — Three Platforms$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 3 review platform profile configurations: One firm location on Google, Avvo and Yelp; assess supported ownership/access and complete approved factual profile fields.
- 1 review request workflow: One client-approved request process, one message template and one staff checklist; platform-specific restrictions and confidentiality reviewed by firm counsel.
- 6 response templates: Two positive, two neutral and two sensitive/negative-response drafts, each up to 150 words; firm approval required before use.
- 1 ethics and escalation note: Up to four pages defining attorney approval, confidential-matter boundaries and complaint escalation.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Three named platforms, one firm/location; provider eligibility verified.
- Pages, words and records
- Three profiles; one request workflow; six response drafts.
- Formats
- Native profile edits; DOCX/PDF templates and workflow.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute profile/process review and one 45-minute staff handoff.
- Client inputs
- Authorized profiles, accurate firm information, counsel-approved request/response rules and named escalation owner.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; provider verification may extend external steps.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for review management setup — three platforms.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Review incentives, fabricated reviews, guaranteed removal/rating changes and ongoing response management excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingReview Management Setup — Three Platforms$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 3 review platform profile configurations: One firm location on Google, Avvo and Yelp; assess supported ownership/access and complete approved factual profile fields.
- 1 review request workflow: One client-approved request process, one message template and one staff checklist; platform-specific restrictions and confidentiality reviewed by firm counsel.
- 6 response templates: Two positive, two neutral and two sensitive/negative-response drafts, each up to 150 words; firm approval required before use.
- 1 ethics and escalation note: Up to four pages defining attorney approval, confidential-matter boundaries and complaint escalation.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Three named platforms, one firm/location; provider eligibility verified.
- Pages, words and records
- Three profiles; one request workflow; six response drafts.
- Formats
- Native profile edits; DOCX/PDF templates and workflow.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute profile/process review and one 45-minute staff handoff.
- Client inputs
- Authorized profiles, accurate firm information, counsel-approved request/response rules and named escalation owner.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; provider verification may extend external steps.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for review management setup — three platforms.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Review incentives, fabricated reviews, guaranteed removal/rating changes and ongoing response management excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Texas Attorney Advertising Review — Defined Marketing InventoryLaw Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingTexas Attorney Advertising Review — Defined Marketing Inventory$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 marketing-surface inventory: Before acceptance enumerate the firm’s entire current public surface; proposed base up to 20 web pages, three social profiles,10 ads and two brochures totaling 20 pages.
- 1 documented marketing review: Assess stated claims, qualifications, disclaimers, contact information and source-supported advertising concerns against attorney-approved review criteria; flag matters requiring current rule/counsel verification.
- 1 issues and recommended-language register: Up to 40 distinct findings with URL/page reference, evidence, risk category and proposed correction language.
- 1 review memorandum: Up to 12 pages with priority actions and a responsible-attorney approval checklist.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm; complete named public inventory fixed before acceptance.
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed base 20 web pages, three profiles,10 ads and 20 brochure pages;40 findings. Larger inventory custom scoped.
- Formats
- XLSX findings register and PDF/DOCX memorandum.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute inventory/criteria meeting and one 60-minute findings review.
- Client inputs
- Full URL/account/ad/brochure inventory, intended jurisdictions, current counsel guidance, approved claims evidence and disclosure policies.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inventory, current review criteria and scheduled start; larger inventories require a written schedule.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for texas attorney advertising review — defined marketing inventory.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal advice, legal-compliance certification, Bar filing/fees and implementation beyond recommended language excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingTexas Attorney Advertising Review — Defined Marketing Inventory$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 marketing-surface inventory: Before acceptance enumerate the firm’s entire current public surface; proposed base up to 20 web pages, three social profiles,10 ads and two brochures totaling 20 pages.
- 1 documented marketing review: Assess stated claims, qualifications, disclaimers, contact information and source-supported advertising concerns against attorney-approved review criteria; flag matters requiring current rule/counsel verification.
- 1 issues and recommended-language register: Up to 40 distinct findings with URL/page reference, evidence, risk category and proposed correction language.
- 1 review memorandum: Up to 12 pages with priority actions and a responsible-attorney approval checklist.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm; complete named public inventory fixed before acceptance.
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed base 20 web pages, three profiles,10 ads and 20 brochure pages;40 findings. Larger inventory custom scoped.
- Formats
- XLSX findings register and PDF/DOCX memorandum.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute inventory/criteria meeting and one 60-minute findings review.
- Client inputs
- Full URL/account/ad/brochure inventory, intended jurisdictions, current counsel guidance, approved claims evidence and disclosure policies.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- 10 business days after complete inventory, current review criteria and scheduled start; larger inventories require a written schedule.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for texas attorney advertising review — defined marketing inventory.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal advice, legal-compliance certification, Bar filing/fees and implementation beyond recommended language excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Firm Newsletter Setup + First IssueLaw Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingFirm Newsletter Setup + First Issue$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 email platform setup: One client-owned Mailchimp or Beehiiv account, sender/domain configuration where authorized, one consented-list import up to 2,500 records and three segments.
- 1 branded newsletter template: One reusable responsive template with firm logo, attorney-approved footer, unsubscribe mechanism and text fallback.
- 1 first newsletter issue: One 600–900-word issue, subject/preheader, up to four supplied images and two intake/resourceCTAs.
- 1 approved distribution: One test proof and one send to one approved audience after attorney sign-off; record delivery/report metrics.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm, one email provider, one sending domain and one audience.
- Pages, words and records
- 2,500 contacts; three segments; one issue 900 words; four images.
- Formats
- Native responsive email and plaintext; DOCX copy; PDF send report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute editorial/setup meeting and one 30-minute attorney proof review.
- Client inputs
- Lawfully collected recipient list, sender/DNS access, brand files, approved sources/articles, footer policy and attorney approver.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; send date requires approved proof and sender readiness.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for firm newsletter setup + first issue.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Purchased lists, recurring issues, domain-mail migration, original photography and guaranteed inbox placement excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingFirm Newsletter Setup + First Issue$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 email platform setup: One client-owned Mailchimp or Beehiiv account, sender/domain configuration where authorized, one consented-list import up to 2,500 records and three segments.
- 1 branded newsletter template: One reusable responsive template with firm logo, attorney-approved footer, unsubscribe mechanism and text fallback.
- 1 first newsletter issue: One 600–900-word issue, subject/preheader, up to four supplied images and two intake/resourceCTAs.
- 1 approved distribution: One test proof and one send to one approved audience after attorney sign-off; record delivery/report metrics.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm, one email provider, one sending domain and one audience.
- Pages, words and records
- 2,500 contacts; three segments; one issue 900 words; four images.
- Formats
- Native responsive email and plaintext; DOCX copy; PDF send report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute editorial/setup meeting and one 30-minute attorney proof review.
- Client inputs
- Lawfully collected recipient list, sender/DNS access, brand files, approved sources/articles, footer policy and attorney approver.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; send date requires approved proof and sender readiness.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for firm newsletter setup + first issue.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Purchased lists, recurring issues, domain-mail migration, original photography and guaranteed inbox placement excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Solo / Two Attorney Firm RetainerLaw Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingSolo / Two Attorney Firm Retainer$4,400 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 1 article per month: One attorney-reviewed article 800–1,200 words, title/meta/CTA and up to five supplied reference sources.
- 4 original social concepts per month: Four article/service messages for one platform, each 150 words maximum with one static visual; four publishing placements.
- 2 site maintenance updates per month: Two content updates up to 300 words each on existing pages, plus one monthly backup/update-status check within current access.
- 1 monthly report: One activity/available-metrics report and 30-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm with one or two attorneys, one existing website and one social platform.
- Pages, words and records
- One 1,200-word article; four social units; two 300-word updates/month.
- Formats
- Native CMS/social publication;1080 square/portrait as the chosen platform requires; PDF report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute onboarding; one 30-minute planning/review each month.
- Client inputs
- Monthly attorney topic/source approvals, site/social access, current maintenance architecture and one firm approver.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- Monthly schedule begins after complete onboarding and an accepted calendar slot; initial calendar in 10 business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for solo / two attorney firm retainer.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional attorneys beyond two, emergency security response, hosting costs, paid media and new site sections require scope.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingSolo / Two Attorney Firm Retainer$4,400 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 1 article per month: One attorney-reviewed article 800–1,200 words, title/meta/CTA and up to five supplied reference sources.
- 4 original social concepts per month: Four article/service messages for one platform, each 150 words maximum with one static visual; four publishing placements.
- 2 site maintenance updates per month: Two content updates up to 300 words each on existing pages, plus one monthly backup/update-status check within current access.
- 1 monthly report: One activity/available-metrics report and 30-minute review.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm with one or two attorneys, one existing website and one social platform.
- Pages, words and records
- One 1,200-word article; four social units; two 300-word updates/month.
- Formats
- Native CMS/social publication;1080 square/portrait as the chosen platform requires; PDF report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute onboarding; one 30-minute planning/review each month.
- Client inputs
- Monthly attorney topic/source approvals, site/social access, current maintenance architecture and one firm approver.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- Monthly schedule begins after complete onboarding and an accepted calendar slot; initial calendar in 10 business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for solo / two attorney firm retainer.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional attorneys beyond two, emergency security response, hosting costs, paid media and new site sections require scope.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $4,400 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Text the Attorney Intake SetupLaw Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingText the Attorney Intake Setup$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 Twilio number and firm routing: One client-owned account/number, up to two attorney destinations and one administrator fallback.
- 1 text intake workflow: Up to eight intake prompts, six approved message templates and one appointment/intake record destination; explicitly route conflict/representation decisions to the attorney.
- 1 website integration: One click-to-text/contact block on an existing firm page with approved disclosure/consent text.
- 12 acceptance scenarios: Test routing, declined/stop responses, missing information and handoff failures with synthetic data; no real prospective-client messages.
- 1 handoff guide: Number ownership, usage limits, retention choices and escalation checklist up to 10 pages.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm, one Twilio number, two attorneys, one admin and one website.
- Pages, words and records
- Eight prompts; six templates; one record destination;12 tests.
- Formats
- SMS/plaintext; native workflow; PDF guide and test log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute intake/confidentiality workshop and one 60-minute attorney acceptance review.
- Client inputs
- Attorney-approved prompts/disclosures, routing roster, provider registration information, data-retention decisions and authorized site/account access.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; carrier/provider approval is an external dependency.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for text the attorney intake setup.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Automated legal advice, conflict clearance, representation acceptance,24/7 human response and compliance certification excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingText the Attorney Intake Setup$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 Twilio number and firm routing: One client-owned account/number, up to two attorney destinations and one administrator fallback.
- 1 text intake workflow: Up to eight intake prompts, six approved message templates and one appointment/intake record destination; explicitly route conflict/representation decisions to the attorney.
- 1 website integration: One click-to-text/contact block on an existing firm page with approved disclosure/consent text.
- 12 acceptance scenarios: Test routing, declined/stop responses, missing information and handoff failures with synthetic data; no real prospective-client messages.
- 1 handoff guide: Number ownership, usage limits, retention choices and escalation checklist up to 10 pages.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm, one Twilio number, two attorneys, one admin and one website.
- Pages, words and records
- Eight prompts; six templates; one record destination;12 tests.
- Formats
- SMS/plaintext; native workflow; PDF guide and test log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute intake/confidentiality workshop and one 60-minute attorney acceptance review.
- Client inputs
- Attorney-approved prompts/disclosures, routing roster, provider registration information, data-retention decisions and authorized site/account access.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; carrier/provider approval is an external dependency.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for text the attorney intake setup.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Automated legal advice, conflict clearance, representation acceptance,24/7 human response and compliance certification excluded.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $4,500 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Law Firm Marketing Audit + 90-Day RoadmapLaw Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingLaw Firm Marketing Audit + 90-Day Roadmap$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 marketing audit: One firm/site up to 30 public pages, three profiles, one email program, one intake path and three local competitors.
- 1 advertising/content concern register: Document source-supported claims/disclosure issues requiring attorney review; up to 30 findings with evidence links.
- 1 90-day roadmap: Three 30-day phases with up to 15 prioritized actions, owners, dependencies and planning budgets labeled assumptions.
- 1 findings presentation: A 12–18-page report and a 60-minute decision session.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm/site, three profiles, one email platform and one intake workflow.
- Pages, words and records
- 30 pages; three competitors;30 findings;15 roadmap actions over 90 days.
- Formats
- PDF report and XLSX action register.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery and one 60-minute findings workshop.
- Client inputs
- Marketing/account inventory, analytics access where available, business priorities, attorney-approved claims and existing vendor contracts.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for law firm marketing audit + 90-day roadmap.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Implementation, original content production, paid campaigns and legal-compliance certification are separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLaw Firm Marketing Audit + 90-Day Roadmap$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 marketing audit: One firm/site up to 30 public pages, three profiles, one email program, one intake path and three local competitors.
- 1 advertising/content concern register: Document source-supported claims/disclosure issues requiring attorney review; up to 30 findings with evidence links.
- 1 90-day roadmap: Three 30-day phases with up to 15 prioritized actions, owners, dependencies and planning budgets labeled assumptions.
- 1 findings presentation: A 12–18-page report and a 60-minute decision session.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm/site, three profiles, one email platform and one intake workflow.
- Pages, words and records
- 30 pages; three competitors;30 findings;15 roadmap actions over 90 days.
- Formats
- PDF report and XLSX action register.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute discovery and one 60-minute findings workshop.
- Client inputs
- Marketing/account inventory, analytics access where available, business priorities, attorney-approved claims and existing vendor contracts.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- 15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for law firm marketing audit + 90-day roadmap.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Implementation, original content production, paid campaigns and legal-compliance certification are separate.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Mid Size Firm Retainer — Three to Six AttorneysLaw Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingMid Size Firm Retainer — Three to Six Attorneys$6,900 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 2 articles per month: Two attorney-reviewed articles 800–1,200 words each, with titles/meta/CTA and documented supplied sources.
- 8 original social concepts per month: Eight unique messages, including article derivatives, adapted across two platforms for up to 16 placements; static images and captions 150 words maximum.
- 4 site maintenance updates per month: Four existing-page content updates up to 300 words each plus monthly backup/update-status review.
- 1 quarterly advertising review: Once each quarter, review up to 10 changed pages and 20 recent social posts; provide issue/correction notes for attorney approval.
- 1 monthly activity report: One report and 45-minute review; quarterly review is included once in its quarter, not charged as a standalone audit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm with three to six attorneys, one existing site and two social platforms.
- Pages, words and records
- Two 1,200-word articles; eight originals/16 placements; four 300-word updates/month; quarterly review 10 pages/20 posts.
- Formats
- DOCX/CMS;1080 square/portrait visuals; PDF/XLSX report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute onboarding; one 45-minute monthly review and one 60-minute quarterly review.
- Client inputs
- Attorney reviewer roster, monthly topics/source records, site/social access, brand assets and change priorities.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- Monthly production begins after complete inputs and accepted calendar; first calendar in 10 business days; quarterly review date fixed in the plan.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for mid size firm retainer — three to six attorneys.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Seven or more attorneys, emergency incident response, new website sections, ad spend and legal opinions require custom scope.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMid Size Firm Retainer — Three to Six Attorneys$6,900 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 2 articles per month: Two attorney-reviewed articles 800–1,200 words each, with titles/meta/CTA and documented supplied sources.
- 8 original social concepts per month: Eight unique messages, including article derivatives, adapted across two platforms for up to 16 placements; static images and captions 150 words maximum.
- 4 site maintenance updates per month: Four existing-page content updates up to 300 words each plus monthly backup/update-status review.
- 1 quarterly advertising review: Once each quarter, review up to 10 changed pages and 20 recent social posts; provide issue/correction notes for attorney approval.
- 1 monthly activity report: One report and 45-minute review; quarterly review is included once in its quarter, not charged as a standalone audit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm with three to six attorneys, one existing site and two social platforms.
- Pages, words and records
- Two 1,200-word articles; eight originals/16 placements; four 300-word updates/month; quarterly review 10 pages/20 posts.
- Formats
- DOCX/CMS;1080 square/portrait visuals; PDF/XLSX report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute onboarding; one 45-minute monthly review and one 60-minute quarterly review.
- Client inputs
- Attorney reviewer roster, monthly topics/source records, site/social access, brand assets and change priorities.
- Approval
- One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
- Delivery
- Monthly production begins after complete inputs and accepted calendar; first calendar in 10 business days; quarterly review date fixed in the plan.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
- Rights and licensing
- Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
- Approve content/configuration outline for mid size firm retainer — three to six attorneys.
- Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
- Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.
Separate costs and exclusions- Seven or more attorneys, emergency incident response, new website sections, ad spend and legal opinions require custom scope.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,900 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Law Firm Website (Prepared for Attorney Review)Law Office Marketing & OperationsIncluded scope and billingLaw Firm Website (Prepared for Attorney Review)$18,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 8 law-firm website pages: Up to eight pages, including up to four practice-area pages and up to two attorney biographies within the total.
- 1 attorney-review copy pass: Up to 5,000 words of light copy/editing with advertising claims, credentials and disclaimers flagged for attorney decision.
- 1 intake path: One form up to 12 fields with one approved routing destination, privacy/confidentiality language supplied or approved by the firm.
- 1 search, testing and handoff package: Metadata for included pages, basic analytics, mobile/desktop and form-route tests, editing guidance.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm, website/domain and intake destination; up to two attorneys and four practice areas.
- Pages, words and records
- Eight pages maximum; 5,000 words; 30 supplied images; 12 intake fields.
- Formats
- Responsive website; editable page copy and attorney-review checklist.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute discovery, one 60-minute design/content review with attorney approver and one 60-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Firm facts, bar/credential information, reviewed service descriptions, privacy/intake policy, authorized access and final attorney approval.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve sitemap and attorney review responsibilities
- Draft/design pages
- Obtain legal-content approval
- Build and test intake/search
- Handoff accepted site
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal advice or advertising-compliance certification
- Trust/IOLTA systems
- Custom case-management integration
- Client matter review
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLaw Firm Website (Prepared for Attorney Review)$18,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 8 law-firm website pages: Up to eight pages, including up to four practice-area pages and up to two attorney biographies within the total.
- 1 attorney-review copy pass: Up to 5,000 words of light copy/editing with advertising claims, credentials and disclaimers flagged for attorney decision.
- 1 intake path: One form up to 12 fields with one approved routing destination, privacy/confidentiality language supplied or approved by the firm.
- 1 search, testing and handoff package: Metadata for included pages, basic analytics, mobile/desktop and form-route tests, editing guidance.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One firm, website/domain and intake destination; up to two attorneys and four practice areas.
- Pages, words and records
- Eight pages maximum; 5,000 words; 30 supplied images; 12 intake fields.
- Formats
- Responsive website; editable page copy and attorney-review checklist.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute discovery, one 60-minute design/content review with attorney approver and one 60-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Firm facts, bar/credential information, reviewed service descriptions, privacy/intake policy, authorized access and final attorney approval.
- Approval
- One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
- Delivery
- 6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
- Revision rounds
- Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Approve sitemap and attorney review responsibilities
- Draft/design pages
- Obtain legal-content approval
- Build and test intake/search
- Handoff accepted site
Separate costs and exclusions- Legal advice or advertising-compliance certification
- Trust/IOLTA systems
- Custom case-management integration
- Client matter review
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $18,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Bandcamp SetupOnline CommerceIncluded scope and billingBandcamp Setup$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 bandcamp setup package: One Bandcamp account; one initial release up to 20 tracks using supplied masters/artwork and approved copy; five merch entries; native listing checks and a 30-minute handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One client-owned Bandcamp account, one initial release up to 20 tracks and five merch listings.
- Pages, words and records
- One client-owned Bandcamp account, one initial release up to 20 tracks and five merch listings.
- Formats
- Native release/merch pages, supplied artwork exports and listing/ownership handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Mastered audio, artwork, approved descriptions/prices, rights/splits, shipping settings and account access.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated listing correction and one upload-error correction cycle.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBandcamp Setup$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 bandcamp setup package: One Bandcamp account; one initial release up to 20 tracks using supplied masters/artwork and approved copy; five merch entries; native listing checks and a 30-minute handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One client-owned Bandcamp account, one initial release up to 20 tracks and five merch listings.
- Pages, words and records
- One client-owned Bandcamp account, one initial release up to 20 tracks and five merch listings.
- Formats
- Native release/merch pages, supplied artwork exports and listing/ownership handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Mastered audio, artwork, approved descriptions/prices, rights/splits, shipping settings and account access.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated listing correction and one upload-error correction cycle.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Product Description Writing (10 SKUs)Online CommerceIncluded scope and billingProduct Description Writing (10 SKUs)$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 product description writing (10 skus) package: Existing ten SKU descriptions of 100–200 words, facts/specifications/search title/meta, one factual revision/spreadsheet.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Ten SKUs, one 100–200-word description each, ten search titles/meta descriptions and one language.
- Pages, words and records
- Ten SKUs, one 100–200-word description each, ten search titles/meta descriptions and one language.
- Formats
- Editable spreadsheet keyed to the ten client SKU identifiers.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute product/voice briefing.
- Client inputs
- Accurate specifications, approved claims, product photos, audience and brand voice.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated factual/style revision per description, preserving the published allowance.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingProduct Description Writing (10 SKUs)$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 product description writing (10 skus) package: Existing ten SKU descriptions of 100–200 words, facts/specifications/search title/meta, one factual revision/spreadsheet.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Ten SKUs, one 100–200-word description each, ten search titles/meta descriptions and one language.
- Pages, words and records
- Ten SKUs, one 100–200-word description each, ten search titles/meta descriptions and one language.
- Formats
- Editable spreadsheet keyed to the ten client SKU identifiers.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute product/voice briefing.
- Client inputs
- Accurate specifications, approved claims, product photos, audience and brand voice.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated factual/style revision per description, preserving the published allowance.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Abandoned Cart Email SequenceOnline CommerceIncluded scope and billingAbandoned Cart Email Sequence$1,900 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 abandoned cart email sequence package: Existing 3 emails up to 350 words, subjects/preheaders/CTAs/layout/timing in one existing store-email integration, 6 tests/one revision.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One store/email integration, three emails up to 350 words each, one trigger flow and six test cases.
- Pages, words and records
- One store/email integration, three emails up to 350 words each, one trigger flow and six test cases.
- Formats
- Three designed native templates, subject/preheader/CTA copy and timing/test log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute flow briefing and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Existing store/ESP access, brand assets, recovery links, approved discounts and client-approved consent rules.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated copy/design rounds and one configuration correction cycle.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingAbandoned Cart Email Sequence$1,900 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 abandoned cart email sequence package: Existing 3 emails up to 350 words, subjects/preheaders/CTAs/layout/timing in one existing store-email integration, 6 tests/one revision.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One store/email integration, three emails up to 350 words each, one trigger flow and six test cases.
- Pages, words and records
- One store/email integration, three emails up to 350 words each, one trigger flow and six test cases.
- Formats
- Three designed native templates, subject/preheader/CTA copy and timing/test log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute flow briefing and one 30-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Existing store/ESP access, brand assets, recovery links, approved discounts and client-approved consent rules.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated copy/design rounds and one configuration correction cycle.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,900 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Product PhotographyOnline CommerceIncluded scope and billingProduct Photography$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 product photography package: One 240-minute product session at the GCM office covering up to 25 physical products; one agreed background/lighting system; 25 primary edited images plus up to 25 second-angle images; full-resolution and web JPEG exports.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One business; 25 products; up to 50 distinct final images.
- Pages, words and records
- One business; 25 products; up to 50 distinct final images.
- Formats
- JPEG full-resolution/web and indexed file delivery.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute shot briefing plus the 240-minute capture session.
- Client inputs
- Clean assembled products, shot priorities, shipping/collection arrangements and image-use requirements.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Within five business days after the scheduled shoot and complete product information.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated correction round on the selected images; new styling or reshoots are separately scoped.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Models, custom props, advanced compositing, additional products, shipping and location rental.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingProduct Photography$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 product photography package: One 240-minute product session at the GCM office covering up to 25 physical products; one agreed background/lighting system; 25 primary edited images plus up to 25 second-angle images; full-resolution and web JPEG exports.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One business; 25 products; up to 50 distinct final images.
- Pages, words and records
- One business; 25 products; up to 50 distinct final images.
- Formats
- JPEG full-resolution/web and indexed file delivery.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute shot briefing plus the 240-minute capture session.
- Client inputs
- Clean assembled products, shot priorities, shipping/collection arrangements and image-use requirements.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Within five business days after the scheduled shoot and complete product information.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated correction round on the selected images; new styling or reshoots are separately scoped.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Models, custom props, advanced compositing, additional products, shipping and location rental.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Print on Demand Storefront SetupOnline CommerceIncluded scope and billingPrint on Demand Storefront Setup$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 print on demand storefront setup package: One store and one print-on-demand provider; ten product styles with 50 variants, supplied artwork, mockups, approved pricing/shipping and one end-to-end test-order verification; one 60-minute handoff. A real sample order requires the client’s express approval of production/shipping costs before purchase.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One storefront, one POD provider, ten product styles and 50 variants; one test-order path.
- Pages, words and records
- One storefront, one POD provider, ten product styles and 50 variants; one test-order path.
- Formats
- Native product/mockup setup, pricing/shipping matrix and verification record.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute intake and one 60-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Client-owned provider/store accounts, print-ready art, approved prices/shipping and provider product choices.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated listing/configuration revisions; new art is separately scoped.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Vendor production/shipping charges for any real sample order are client-paid and require express approval before purchase. The included service covers one end-to-end test-order verification; ongoing fulfillment, returns and additional test orders require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPrint on Demand Storefront Setup$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 print on demand storefront setup package: One store and one print-on-demand provider; ten product styles with 50 variants, supplied artwork, mockups, approved pricing/shipping and one end-to-end test-order verification; one 60-minute handoff. A real sample order requires the client’s express approval of production/shipping costs before purchase.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One storefront, one POD provider, ten product styles and 50 variants; one test-order path.
- Pages, words and records
- One storefront, one POD provider, ten product styles and 50 variants; one test-order path.
- Formats
- Native product/mockup setup, pricing/shipping matrix and verification record.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute intake and one 60-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Client-owned provider/store accounts, print-ready art, approved prices/shipping and provider product choices.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated listing/configuration revisions; new art is separately scoped.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Vendor production/shipping charges for any real sample order are client-paid and require express approval before purchase. The included service covers one end-to-end test-order verification; ongoing fulfillment, returns and additional test orders require separate scope.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Etsy Storefront Setup + Listing OptimizationOnline CommerceIncluded scope and billingEtsy Storefront Setup + Listing Optimization$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 etsy storefront setup + listing optimization package: One Etsy shop/banner/profile/approved policies, existing 10 listings with copy/tags/photos, payment/shipping and 60-minute handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One Etsy shop, ten listings, 50 variants and one branded banner.
- Pages, words and records
- One Etsy shop, ten listings, 50 variants and one branded banner.
- Formats
- Native shop/listings, approved policy pages, listing keyword sheet and handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute intake and one 60-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Verified owner account, product facts/photos, prices, shipping/return policy and rights to sell.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds across the shop and listings.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingEtsy Storefront Setup + Listing Optimization$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 etsy storefront setup + listing optimization package: One Etsy shop/banner/profile/approved policies, existing 10 listings with copy/tags/photos, payment/shipping and 60-minute handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One Etsy shop, ten listings, 50 variants and one branded banner.
- Pages, words and records
- One Etsy shop, ten listings, 50 variants and one branded banner.
- Formats
- Native shop/listings, approved policy pages, listing keyword sheet and handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute intake and one 60-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Verified owner account, product facts/photos, prices, shipping/return policy and rights to sell.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds across the shop and listings.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Amazon Handmade / Seller Central SetupOnline CommerceIncluded scope and billingAmazon Handmade / Seller Central Setup$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 amazon handmade / seller central setup package: One Amazon application/brand/10 listings/30 variants, document checklist/category metadata, supplied assets/fulfillment, one response cycle/90-minute handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One seller entity, one Amazon application, one eligible brand-registry submission and ten listings with 30 variants.
- Pages, words and records
- One seller entity, one Amazon application, one eligible brand-registry submission and ten listings with 30 variants.
- Formats
- Application/checklist, native listings and provider response/error log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute intake and one 90-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Legal owner account, verification documents, brand/trademark eligibility, product identifiers and fulfillment policies.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 4 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated listing revision and one marketplace response cycle; acceptance is provider-controlled.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingAmazon Handmade / Seller Central Setup$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 amazon handmade / seller central setup package: One Amazon application/brand/10 listings/30 variants, document checklist/category metadata, supplied assets/fulfillment, one response cycle/90-minute handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One seller entity, one Amazon application, one eligible brand-registry submission and ten listings with 30 variants.
- Pages, words and records
- One seller entity, one Amazon application, one eligible brand-registry submission and ten listings with 30 variants.
- Formats
- Application/checklist, native listings and provider response/error log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute intake and one 90-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Legal owner account, verification documents, brand/trademark eligibility, product identifiers and fulfillment policies.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 4 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated listing revision and one marketplace response cycle; acceptance is provider-controlled.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Walmart Marketplace SetupOnline CommerceIncluded scope and billingWalmart Marketplace Setup$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 walmart marketplace setup package: One Walmart Marketplace application/brand setup and up to five listings with 15 variants; document checklist, approved shipping/returns, import/error log, one marketplace response cycle and 90-minute handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One seller entity, one Walmart Marketplace application, one brand setup and five listings with 15 variants.
- Pages, words and records
- One seller entity, one Walmart Marketplace application, one brand setup and five listings with 15 variants.
- Formats
- Application checklist, listing import/error log and native listings if approved.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute intake and one 90-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Owner verification, product identifiers, inventory/fulfillment policies and approved assets/prices.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 6 to 8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated listing revision and one marketplace response cycle; approval is not guaranteed.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingWalmart Marketplace Setup$8,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 walmart marketplace setup package: One Walmart Marketplace application/brand setup and up to five listings with 15 variants; document checklist, approved shipping/returns, import/error log, one marketplace response cycle and 90-minute handoff.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One seller entity, one Walmart Marketplace application, one brand setup and five listings with 15 variants.
- Pages, words and records
- One seller entity, one Walmart Marketplace application, one brand setup and five listings with 15 variants.
- Formats
- Application checklist, listing import/error log and native listings if approved.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute intake and one 90-minute handoff.
- Client inputs
- Owner verification, product identifiers, inventory/fulfillment policies and approved assets/prices.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 6 to 8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated listing revision and one marketplace response cycle; approval is not guaranteed.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $8,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Podcast Recording SessionPhotography & VideoIncluded scope and billingPodcast Recording Session$750 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 podcast recording session package: One guided audio-recording session lasting 60–90 minutes for up to three participants; one edited audio episode from that session, up to 90 minutes; one draft show-note document up to 600 words.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One episode, one recording location/connection and three participants; one agreed straightforward edit pass.
- Pages, words and records
- One episode, one recording location/connection and three participants; one agreed straightforward edit pass.
- Formats
- WAV master, MP3 listening copy and DOCX show notes.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute preparation call and the 60–90-minute recording session.
- Client inputs
- Prepared discussion outline, participant consent/availability, recording access and any supplied authorized media.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as recording; exact acceptance deadline confirmed before booking.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated factual note correction and one edit correction to agreed specifications.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Guest booking, licensed music/clips, video, extensive restoration, transcripts, publishing, distribution and promotion.
How the engagement begins: Checkout requests a recording time. Good Creative Media confirms the session plan and availability before acceptance; if the session cannot be accommodated, the payment is refunded in full. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPodcast Recording Session$750 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 podcast recording session package: One guided audio-recording session lasting 60–90 minutes for up to three participants; one edited audio episode from that session, up to 90 minutes; one draft show-note document up to 600 words.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One episode, one recording location/connection and three participants; one agreed straightforward edit pass.
- Pages, words and records
- One episode, one recording location/connection and three participants; one agreed straightforward edit pass.
- Formats
- WAV master, MP3 listening copy and DOCX show notes.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute preparation call and the 60–90-minute recording session.
- Client inputs
- Prepared discussion outline, participant consent/availability, recording access and any supplied authorized media.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as recording; exact acceptance deadline confirmed before booking.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated factual note correction and one edit correction to agreed specifications.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Guest booking, licensed music/clips, video, extensive restoration, transcripts, publishing, distribution and promotion.
How the engagement begins: Checkout requests a recording time. Good Creative Media confirms the session plan and availability before acceptance; if the session cannot be accommodated, the payment is refunded in full. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $750 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Headshot SessionPhotography & VideoIncluded scope and billingHeadshot Session$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 headshot session package: One 90-minute headshot session at one agreed studio or local location for one person; up to two wardrobe looks; five edited final images, each in full-resolution and web JPEG.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One subject, one location, two looks and five distinct final photographs.
- Pages, words and records
- One subject, one location, two looks and five distinct final photographs.
- Formats
- High-resolution and web JPEGs with one selection gallery.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute preparation call and the 90-minute capture session.
- Client inputs
- Subject availability, wardrobe, intended uses, access and any specific image requirements.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as the shoot; exact date agreed before booking.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated retouch correction on the five selected photographs.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Hair/makeup, studio/location rental, travel outside the accepted area, extra subjects, extra selects and complex composites.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingHeadshot Session$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 headshot session package: One 90-minute headshot session at one agreed studio or local location for one person; up to two wardrobe looks; five edited final images, each in full-resolution and web JPEG.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One subject, one location, two looks and five distinct final photographs.
- Pages, words and records
- One subject, one location, two looks and five distinct final photographs.
- Formats
- High-resolution and web JPEGs with one selection gallery.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute preparation call and the 90-minute capture session.
- Client inputs
- Subject availability, wardrobe, intended uses, access and any specific image requirements.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as the shoot; exact date agreed before booking.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated retouch correction on the five selected photographs.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Hair/makeup, studio/location rental, travel outside the accepted area, extra subjects, extra selects and complex composites.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Short Form Vertical Video (Single)Photography & VideoIncluded scope and billingShort Form Vertical Video (Single)$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 short form vertical video (single) package: One concept and one 15–60-second vertical video for one named platform; one shoot up to 90 minutes at one location, simple edit/color/audio, readable captions, hook and cover frame.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one concept, one location and one finished vertical video.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand, one concept, one location and one finished vertical video.
- Formats
- 1080×1920 H.264 MP4, cover JPG and caption file where applicable.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute concept briefing, the 90-minute capture session and one 20-minute review.
- Client inputs
- Approved offer/script, subject permissions, location access and rights to supplied music/media.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- One week after complete inputs and scheduled capture.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions on the agreed concept.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Platform management, paid spend, actors, additional locations, complex animation and alternate concepts.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingShort Form Vertical Video (Single)$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 short form vertical video (single) package: One concept and one 15–60-second vertical video for one named platform; one shoot up to 90 minutes at one location, simple edit/color/audio, readable captions, hook and cover frame.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one concept, one location and one finished vertical video.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand, one concept, one location and one finished vertical video.
- Formats
- 1080×1920 H.264 MP4, cover JPG and caption file where applicable.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute concept briefing, the 90-minute capture session and one 20-minute review.
- Client inputs
- Approved offer/script, subject permissions, location access and rights to supplied music/media.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- One week after complete inputs and scheduled capture.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated revisions on the agreed concept.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Platform management, paid spend, actors, additional locations, complex animation and alternate concepts.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Photo Editing / Retouching Pack (10 Images)Photography & VideoIncluded scope and billingPhoto Editing / Retouching Pack (10 Images)$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 photo editing / retouching pack (10 images) package: Ten client-supplied photographs; color/exposure correction plus ordinary portrait/object retouching; deliver one standard and one retouched version per original, 20 final files.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Ten original images, two versions each; one agreed visual treatment.
- Pages, words and records
- Ten original images, two versions each; one agreed visual treatment.
- Formats
- High-resolution JPEG/TIFF as agreed plus web JPEG copies; versions remain ten distinct subjects.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute retouch briefing.
- Client inputs
- Ten original high-resolution files, reference look, intended output and specific retouch notes.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- One week after complete input files and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated correction round on all ten originals.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Compositing, new objects/background construction, severe restoration, extra images and source photography.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingPhoto Editing / Retouching Pack (10 Images)$1,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 photo editing / retouching pack (10 images) package: Ten client-supplied photographs; color/exposure correction plus ordinary portrait/object retouching; deliver one standard and one retouched version per original, 20 final files.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- Ten original images, two versions each; one agreed visual treatment.
- Pages, words and records
- Ten original images, two versions each; one agreed visual treatment.
- Formats
- High-resolution JPEG/TIFF as agreed plus web JPEG copies; versions remain ten distinct subjects.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 20-minute retouch briefing.
- Client inputs
- Ten original high-resolution files, reference look, intended output and specific retouch notes.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- One week after complete input files and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated correction round on all ten originals.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Compositing, new objects/background construction, severe restoration, extra images and source photography.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Drone Aerial PhotographyPhotography & VideoIncluded scope and billingDrone Aerial Photography$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 drone aerial photography package: One aerial-stills visit at one venue/property/event with up to 90 minutes of flight time, subject to approved operating conditions; 20 edited final photographs and documented flight conditions/required authorization.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One site, one scheduled visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and 20 distinct images.
- Pages, words and records
- One site, one scheduled visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and 20 distinct images.
- Formats
- High-resolution and web JPEGs plus operating-condition/authorization record.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute flight/shot briefing and the agreed onsite flight window.
- Client inputs
- Site coordinates, owner access, requested views, event schedule and intended use.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as the confirmed flight; exact date and weather contingency agreed before acceptance.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated color/crop correction to 20 selected images; an additional flight is a separate scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Travel outside accepted area, permits/third-party fees, extra visits and flight that cannot be lawfully or safely conducted.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingDrone Aerial Photography$1,700 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 drone aerial photography package: One aerial-stills visit at one venue/property/event with up to 90 minutes of flight time, subject to approved operating conditions; 20 edited final photographs and documented flight conditions/required authorization.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One site, one scheduled visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and 20 distinct images.
- Pages, words and records
- One site, one scheduled visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and 20 distinct images.
- Formats
- High-resolution and web JPEGs plus operating-condition/authorization record.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute flight/shot briefing and the agreed onsite flight window.
- Client inputs
- Site coordinates, owner access, requested views, event schedule and intended use.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as the confirmed flight; exact date and weather contingency agreed before acceptance.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated color/crop correction to 20 selected images; an additional flight is a separate scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Travel outside accepted area, permits/third-party fees, extra visits and flight that cannot be lawfully or safely conducted.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,700 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Event Photography, Half DayPhotography & VideoIncluded scope and billingEvent Photography, Half Day$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 event photography, half day package: One event photography visit up to 240 consecutive minutes at one venue; a proposed new-order target of 40 edited distinct selects, confirmed with the event plan before acceptance; full-resolution and web JPEG gallery.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event, one venue, 240-minute capture window and 40 selected final photographs for new orders.
- Pages, words and records
- One event, one venue, 240-minute capture window and 40 selected final photographs for new orders.
- Formats
- Private digital gallery, print-resolution and web-resolution JPEGs; owned website/social usage retained.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute production briefing and the 240-minute capture session.
- Client inputs
- Event schedule, access/permissions, priority list, organizer contact and intended use.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as capture; exact date agreed before booking.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated color/crop correction to the agreed selects.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Printing, extensive retouching, commercial resale rights, travel outside accepted area and extended coverage.
How the engagement begins: Checkout requests the date. Good Creative Media confirms availability and the written coverage plan before the booking is accepted; if the date cannot be accommodated, the payment is refunded in full. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingEvent Photography, Half Day$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 event photography, half day package: One event photography visit up to 240 consecutive minutes at one venue; a proposed new-order target of 40 edited distinct selects, confirmed with the event plan before acceptance; full-resolution and web JPEG gallery.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event, one venue, 240-minute capture window and 40 selected final photographs for new orders.
- Pages, words and records
- One event, one venue, 240-minute capture window and 40 selected final photographs for new orders.
- Formats
- Private digital gallery, print-resolution and web-resolution JPEGs; owned website/social usage retained.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute production briefing and the 240-minute capture session.
- Client inputs
- Event schedule, access/permissions, priority list, organizer contact and intended use.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as capture; exact date agreed before booking.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated color/crop correction to the agreed selects.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Printing, extensive retouching, commercial resale rights, travel outside accepted area and extended coverage.
How the engagement begins: Checkout requests the date. Good Creative Media confirms availability and the written coverage plan before the booking is accepted; if the date cannot be accommodated, the payment is refunded in full. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Brand Photography SessionPhotography & VideoIncluded scope and billingBrand Photography Session$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 brand photography session package: One 240-minute brand photography session for one brand at one location; up to three prepared scenes/looks; 30 edited final images, each in high-resolution and web versions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one location, three scenes and 30 distinct final photographs.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand, one location, three scenes and 30 distinct final photographs.
- Formats
- High-resolution and web JPEGs and one selection gallery.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute production briefing, 240-minute capture and one 30-minute select review.
- Client inputs
- Brand story/shot list, prepared subjects/products, wardrobe/props, location access and permissions.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as the shoot; exact date agreed before booking.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated retouch correction on 30 selects.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Models, hair/makeup, hired props/location, extensive compositing, additional venues and ongoing content production.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBrand Photography Session$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 brand photography session package: One 240-minute brand photography session for one brand at one location; up to three prepared scenes/looks; 30 edited final images, each in high-resolution and web versions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one location, three scenes and 30 distinct final photographs.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand, one location, three scenes and 30 distinct final photographs.
- Formats
- High-resolution and web JPEGs and one selection gallery.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute production briefing, 240-minute capture and one 30-minute select review.
- Client inputs
- Brand story/shot list, prepared subjects/products, wardrobe/props, location access and permissions.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as the shoot; exact date agreed before booking.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated retouch correction on 30 selects.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Models, hair/makeup, hired props/location, extensive compositing, additional venues and ongoing content production.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Drone Aerial VideoPhotography & VideoIncluded scope and billingDrone Aerial Video$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 drone aerial video package: One aerial-video visit at one site with up to 90 minutes of flight time; one edited 60–90-second highlight reel and delivery of the captured raw footage.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One site, one visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and one finished reel.
- Pages, words and records
- One site, one visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and one finished reel.
- Formats
- 1920×1080 H.264 reel and original captured camera files through one download handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute production briefing and one 30-minute edit review; flight window separately scheduled.
- Client inputs
- Site coordinates/access, shot priorities, approved subject permissions and intended use.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as the confirmed flight; exact date/weather contingency agreed before acceptance.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated reel revisions; additional flight capture is a new scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Restricted/unavailable flight, external permit/travel/music fees, extra sites and additional capture visits.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingDrone Aerial Video$3,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 drone aerial video package: One aerial-video visit at one site with up to 90 minutes of flight time; one edited 60–90-second highlight reel and delivery of the captured raw footage.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One site, one visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and one finished reel.
- Pages, words and records
- One site, one visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and one finished reel.
- Formats
- 1920×1080 H.264 reel and original captured camera files through one download handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute production briefing and one 30-minute edit review; flight window separately scheduled.
- Client inputs
- Site coordinates/access, shot priorities, approved subject permissions and intended use.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as the confirmed flight; exact date/weather contingency agreed before acceptance.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated reel revisions; additional flight capture is a new scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Restricted/unavailable flight, external permit/travel/music fees, extra sites and additional capture visits.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Event Photography, Full DayPhotography & VideoIncluded scope and billingEvent Photography, Full Day$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 event photography, full day package: One event photography visit up to 480 minutes at one venue; an edited gallery of 80 distinct selected photographs for new orders with high-resolution and web JPEGs.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event, one venue, 480-minute capture window and 80 selected images.
- Pages, words and records
- One event, one venue, 480-minute capture window and 80 selected images.
- Formats
- Private gallery and high-resolution/web JPEG files.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute production briefing plus the 480-minute coverage window with agreed breaks.
- Client inputs
- Run of show, priority moments, venue access, subject permissions and organizer contact.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as capture; exact date agreed before booking.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated color/crop correction on selected images.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Multi-day coverage, extra venues/operators, prints, extensive retouching and travel outside accepted area.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingEvent Photography, Full Day$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 event photography, full day package: One event photography visit up to 480 minutes at one venue; an edited gallery of 80 distinct selected photographs for new orders with high-resolution and web JPEGs.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One event, one venue, 480-minute capture window and 80 selected images.
- Pages, words and records
- One event, one venue, 480-minute capture window and 80 selected images.
- Formats
- Private gallery and high-resolution/web JPEG files.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute production briefing plus the 480-minute coverage window with agreed breaks.
- Client inputs
- Run of show, priority moments, venue access, subject permissions and organizer contact.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Delivery within the same calendar week as capture; exact date agreed before booking.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated color/crop correction on selected images.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Multi-day coverage, extra venues/operators, prints, extensive retouching and travel outside accepted area.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Short Form Video Pack (5)Photography & VideoIncluded scope and billingShort Form Video Pack (5)$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 short form video pack (5) package: One half-day shoot up to 240 minutes at the GCM office or one client location; five distinct 15–60-second vertical videos, each with hook, captions and one cover.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one location, five concepts and five finished videos.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand, one location, five concepts and five finished videos.
- Formats
- Five 1080×1920 H.264 MP4 s, five covers and applicable caption files.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute preproduction, 240-minute capture and one 45-minute batch review.
- Client inputs
- Five approved briefs, prepared subjects, access/permissions and cleared media/music.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Two weeks after complete inputs and scheduled shoot.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated batch revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional shoot locations, actors, complex animation, platform management and paid media.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingShort Form Video Pack (5)$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 short form video pack (5) package: One half-day shoot up to 240 minutes at the GCM office or one client location; five distinct 15–60-second vertical videos, each with hook, captions and one cover.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one location, five concepts and five finished videos.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand, one location, five concepts and five finished videos.
- Formats
- Five 1080×1920 H.264 MP4 s, five covers and applicable caption files.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute preproduction, 240-minute capture and one 45-minute batch review.
- Client inputs
- Five approved briefs, prepared subjects, access/permissions and cleared media/music.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Two weeks after complete inputs and scheduled shoot.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated batch revisions.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional shoot locations, actors, complex animation, platform management and paid media.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $4,500 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Live Stream Production SetupPhotography & VideoIncluded scope and billingLive Stream Production Setup$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 live stream production setup package: Configure one OBS/switcher workflow for one event, up to three compatible cameras, four audio inputs and two streaming destinations; one rehearsal up to 90 minutes and coordination of one live show up to 180 minutes.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One venue/production computer, three cameras, four audio inputs, two destinations and one show.
- Pages, words and records
- One venue/production computer, three cameras, four audio inputs, two destinations and one show.
- Formats
- Saved OBS configuration/scene set, signal diagram, test checklist and operator handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute technical briefing, one 90-minute rehearsal and one 30-minute handoff; show window up to 180 minutes.
- Client inputs
- Compatible equipment/internet, authorized destinations, run of show, venue access and media/performer permissions.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Two weeks of preparation before the accepted live date after complete technical inputs.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated scene/technical revision after rehearsal; show changes outside agreed inputs require a quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Equipment rental/purchase, internet service, platform fees, extra operators, recording postproduction and additional shows.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingLive Stream Production Setup$4,500 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 live stream production setup package: Configure one OBS/switcher workflow for one event, up to three compatible cameras, four audio inputs and two streaming destinations; one rehearsal up to 90 minutes and coordination of one live show up to 180 minutes.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One venue/production computer, three cameras, four audio inputs, two destinations and one show.
- Pages, words and records
- One venue/production computer, three cameras, four audio inputs, two destinations and one show.
- Formats
- Saved OBS configuration/scene set, signal diagram, test checklist and operator handoff.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute technical briefing, one 90-minute rehearsal and one 30-minute handoff; show window up to 180 minutes.
- Client inputs
- Compatible equipment/internet, authorized destinations, run of show, venue access and media/performer permissions.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Two weeks of preparation before the accepted live date after complete technical inputs.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated scene/technical revision after rehearsal; show changes outside agreed inputs require a quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Equipment rental/purchase, internet service, platform fees, extra operators, recording postproduction and additional shows.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $4,500 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Brand VideoPhotography & VideoIncluded scope and billingBrand Video$10,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 brand video package: One 60–90-second brand film; one agreed treatment/storyboard, one 240-minute shoot at one location, edit, color and sound design; one master and one matching vertical adaptation.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one location, up to three on-camera participants and one 60–90-second film.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand, one location, up to three on-camera participants and one 60–90-second film.
- Formats
- 1920×1080 H.264 master, 1080×1920 adaptation and captions for intelligible speech.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute concept meeting, 240-minute shoot and two 30-minute edit reviews.
- Client inputs
- Approved brief/claims, participants/releases, location permissions, brand assets and cleared media.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Six weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start, including the agreed shoot date.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds, preserving the published allowance.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Actors, additional locations/shoots, travel outside accepted area, complex animation and third-party licenses.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBrand Video$10,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 brand video package: One 60–90-second brand film; one agreed treatment/storyboard, one 240-minute shoot at one location, edit, color and sound design; one master and one matching vertical adaptation.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One brand, one location, up to three on-camera participants and one 60–90-second film.
- Pages, words and records
- One brand, one location, up to three on-camera participants and one 60–90-second film.
- Formats
- 1920×1080 H.264 master, 1080×1920 adaptation and captions for intelligible speech.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute concept meeting, 240-minute shoot and two 30-minute edit reviews.
- Client inputs
- Approved brief/claims, participants/releases, location permissions, brand assets and cleared media.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Six weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start, including the agreed shoot date.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated rounds, preserving the published allowance.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Actors, additional locations/shoots, travel outside accepted area, complex animation and third-party licenses.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $10,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Documentary ShortPhotography & VideoIncluded scope and billingDocumentary Short$20,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 documentary short package: One documentary short of 5–10 minutes about one person/project/organization; story outline, up to three interviews and two local locations over two capture sessions of up to 240 minutes each; b-roll, edit, sound design and color.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One subject/story, three interviews, two locations, two capture sessions and one 5–10-minute film.
- Pages, words and records
- One subject/story, three interviews, two locations, two capture sessions and one 5–10-minute film.
- Formats
- 1920×1080 H.264 master, caption file and one JPEG poster frame.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute story briefing, two capture sessions and two 45-minute edit reviews.
- Client inputs
- Source access, factual timeline, interview availability, location/releases and cleared archive material.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Eight weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated story/edit rounds; additional reporting or a new thesis is change scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Travel outside accepted area, archive/music licenses, actors, extra interviews/locations and expanded running time.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingDocumentary Short$20,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 documentary short package: One documentary short of 5–10 minutes about one person/project/organization; story outline, up to three interviews and two local locations over two capture sessions of up to 240 minutes each; b-roll, edit, sound design and color.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One subject/story, three interviews, two locations, two capture sessions and one 5–10-minute film.
- Pages, words and records
- One subject/story, three interviews, two locations, two capture sessions and one 5–10-minute film.
- Formats
- 1920×1080 H.264 master, caption file and one JPEG poster frame.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 90-minute story briefing, two capture sessions and two 45-minute edit reviews.
- Client inputs
- Source access, factual timeline, interview availability, location/releases and cleared archive material.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Eight weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated story/edit rounds; additional reporting or a new thesis is change scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Travel outside accepted area, archive/music licenses, actors, extra interviews/locations and expanded running time.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $20,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Quarterly Strategy SessionStrategy & ConsultingIncluded scope and billingQuarterly Strategy Session$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 quarterly strategy session package: One 120-minute quarterly strategy session for one business/act; one written quarterly note up to three pages stating three priorities, measures and decisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization, four client participants and three quarterly priorities.
- Pages, words and records
- One organization, four client participants and three quarterly priorities.
- Formats
- Live video/in-person session as agreed and PDF/DOCX quarterly note.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 120-minute strategy session; asynchronous intake included.
- Client inputs
- Prior-period results, current plan, constraints and three decision questions.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Scheduled once in the agreed quarter; written note within three business days after complete session inputs.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated factual clarification of the quarterly note.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Implementation, new research studies, additional organizations and additional sessions.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingQuarterly Strategy Session$2,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 quarterly strategy session package: One 120-minute quarterly strategy session for one business/act; one written quarterly note up to three pages stating three priorities, measures and decisions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization, four client participants and three quarterly priorities.
- Pages, words and records
- One organization, four client participants and three quarterly priorities.
- Formats
- Live video/in-person session as agreed and PDF/DOCX quarterly note.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 120-minute strategy session; asynchronous intake included.
- Client inputs
- Prior-period results, current plan, constraints and three decision questions.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Scheduled once in the agreed quarter; written note within three business days after complete session inputs.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated factual clarification of the quarterly note.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Implementation, new research studies, additional organizations and additional sessions.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Scope inquiryStrategy & ConsultingIncluded scope and billingExpert Witness or Consultation — Fixed Scope InquiryCustom written scope and fixed-price quote required Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed. Included deliverables- 1 expert witness or consultation package: One case-specific marketing/media consultation requires a written fixed-fee scope before ordering. A proposed consultation base covers one matter, up to 100 supplied document pages, five questions and one 60-minute findings conference. A written opinion, deposition or testimony is included only when explicitly named and priced in the accepted case scope.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One matter; proposed consultation base 100 pages/five questions; larger records, opinion length and appearance dates require individual fixed quotes.
- Pages, words and records
- One matter; proposed consultation base 100 pages/five questions; larger records, opinion length and appearance dates require individual fixed quotes.
- Formats
- Secure document index and findings conference; any opinion/report format stated explicitly in the case proposal.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute intake and one 60-minute findings conference for the consultation base.
- Client inputs
- Counsel identity, conflict-check information, matter questions, relevant records, deadline and permitted use.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Case-specific business-day delivery and appearance dates confirmed in the accepted fixed-fee proposal.
- Revision rounds
- One factual clarification; any written opinion revision allowance specified in the accepted case scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- No automatic testimony/opinion commitment; travel, extensive record volumes and additional proceedings require an accepted fixed quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingExpert Witness or Consultation — Fixed Scope InquiryCustom written scope and fixed-price quote required Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed. Included deliverables- 1 expert witness or consultation package: One case-specific marketing/media consultation requires a written fixed-fee scope before ordering. A proposed consultation base covers one matter, up to 100 supplied document pages, five questions and one 60-minute findings conference. A written opinion, deposition or testimony is included only when explicitly named and priced in the accepted case scope.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One matter; proposed consultation base 100 pages/five questions; larger records, opinion length and appearance dates require individual fixed quotes.
- Pages, words and records
- One matter; proposed consultation base 100 pages/five questions; larger records, opinion length and appearance dates require individual fixed quotes.
- Formats
- Secure document index and findings conference; any opinion/report format stated explicitly in the case proposal.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 30-minute intake and one 60-minute findings conference for the consultation base.
- Client inputs
- Counsel identity, conflict-check information, matter questions, relevant records, deadline and permitted use.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Case-specific business-day delivery and appearance dates confirmed in the accepted fixed-fee proposal.
- Revision rounds
- One factual clarification; any written opinion revision allowance specified in the accepted case scope.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- No automatic testimony/opinion commitment; travel, extensive record volumes and additional proceedings require an accepted fixed quote.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Custom written scope and fixed-price quote required | Scope inquiry |
|---|
Annual Planning WorkshopStrategy & ConsultingIncluded scope and billingAnnual Planning Workshop$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 annual planning workshop package: One full-day planning workshop up to 360 facilitated minutes plus agreed breaks for one organization/act and up to eight participants; one annual plan up to 12 pages with four quarterly milestones and a prioritized action register up to 20 actions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization, eight participants, one planning year, four quarter plans and 20 actions.
- Pages, words and records
- One organization, eight participants, one planning year, four quarter plans and 20 actions.
- Formats
- Live workshop materials, PDF/DOCX annual plan and editable action register.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute preparation call, one 360-minute workshop and one 30-minute plan review.
- Client inputs
- Current business/artist plan, prior results, proposed budget constraints and decision-maker attendance.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Workshop on one accepted day; annual plan within five business days after the workshop and complete inputs.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated annual-plan revision.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Implementation, new market-research studies, venue/catering/travel and additional workshops.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingAnnual Planning Workshop$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 annual planning workshop package: One full-day planning workshop up to 360 facilitated minutes plus agreed breaks for one organization/act and up to eight participants; one annual plan up to 12 pages with four quarterly milestones and a prioritized action register up to 20 actions.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One organization, eight participants, one planning year, four quarter plans and 20 actions.
- Pages, words and records
- One organization, eight participants, one planning year, four quarter plans and 20 actions.
- Formats
- Live workshop materials, PDF/DOCX annual plan and editable action register.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute preparation call, one 360-minute workshop and one 30-minute plan review.
- Client inputs
- Current business/artist plan, prior results, proposed budget constraints and decision-maker attendance.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Workshop on one accepted day; annual plan within five business days after the workshop and complete inputs.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated annual-plan revision.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Implementation, new market-research studies, venue/catering/travel and additional workshops.
How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Venue Pitch KitTouring & BookingIncluded scope and billingVenue Pitch Kit$1,900 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 venue pitch kit package: One booking one-sheet for print/web, 3 pitch-email templates, researched list of 25 suitable venues/talent buyers with contacts, source/date evidence and follow-up cadence plan; two consolidated revisions; built from existing EPK.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act, one booking one-sheet, three email templates and 25 researched suitable venues/talent buyers.
- Pages, words and records
- One act, one booking one-sheet, three email templates and 25 researched suitable venues/talent buyers.
- Formats
- Print/web PDF, editable email copy and spreadsheet with contacts/source dates and follow-up cadence.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute booking brief and one 30-minute target review.
- Client inputs
- Existing EPK, draw/genre evidence, available dates, approved artist terms and target exclusions.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated kit/list revisions; outreach itself is separate.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- No actual sending or negotiations and no new EPK unless separately accepted. One suitable room is one verified venue/program, not a recipient count.
How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingVenue Pitch Kit$1,900 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 venue pitch kit package: One booking one-sheet for print/web, 3 pitch-email templates, researched list of 25 suitable venues/talent buyers with contacts, source/date evidence and follow-up cadence plan; two consolidated revisions; built from existing EPK.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act, one booking one-sheet, three email templates and 25 researched suitable venues/talent buyers.
- Pages, words and records
- One act, one booking one-sheet, three email templates and 25 researched suitable venues/talent buyers.
- Formats
- Print/web PDF, editable email copy and spreadsheet with contacts/source dates and follow-up cadence.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute booking brief and one 30-minute target review.
- Client inputs
- Existing EPK, draw/genre evidence, available dates, approved artist terms and target exclusions.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated kit/list revisions; outreach itself is separate.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- No actual sending or negotiations and no new EPK unless separately accepted. One suitable room is one verified venue/program, not a recipient count.
How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,900 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Monthly Booking RetainerTouring & BookingIncluded scope and billingMonthly Booking Retainer$2,500 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 3 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 1 monthly booking retainer package: Fifteen suitable new venue pitches per month with two appropriate follow-ups per pitch; five show-advance updates, calendar/hold tracking and reply logging; one 30-minute review and one-page monthly report. Artist approves terms and targets before outreach.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act; 15 new venue pitches, two follow-ups per pitch and five show-advance records each month.
- Pages, words and records
- One act; 15 new venue pitches, two follow-ups per pitch and five show-advance records each month.
- Formats
- Calendar/hold ledger, contact/response log, five advance updates and one-page monthly report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Current EPK, availability, rider, artist-approved terms, target approval and venue contacts.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Monthly, 3-month minimum. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated monthly target/pitch revision and factual corrections to five advance records.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional pitches beyond the finite monthly pool, performance staffing, travel purchases, contracts or commission arrangements require separate written scope; no booking outcome is guaranteed.
How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins. How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingMonthly Booking Retainer$2,500 / month Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 3 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule. Included deliverables- 1 monthly booking retainer package: Fifteen suitable new venue pitches per month with two appropriate follow-ups per pitch; five show-advance updates, calendar/hold tracking and reply logging; one 30-minute review and one-page monthly report. Artist approves terms and targets before outreach.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act; 15 new venue pitches, two follow-ups per pitch and five show-advance records each month.
- Pages, words and records
- One act; 15 new venue pitches, two follow-ups per pitch and five show-advance records each month.
- Formats
- Calendar/hold ledger, contact/response log, five advance updates and one-page monthly report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly review.
- Client inputs
- Current EPK, availability, rider, artist-approved terms, target approval and venue contacts.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- Monthly, 3-month minimum. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated monthly target/pitch revision and factual corrections to five advance records.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Additional pitches beyond the finite monthly pool, performance staffing, travel purchases, contracts or commission arrangements require separate written scope; no booking outcome is guaranteed.
How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins. How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,500 / month | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Booking Outreach Campaign for a Regional RunTouring & BookingIncluded scope and billingBooking Outreach Campaign for a Regional Run$3,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 booking outreach campaign for a regional run package: Twenty-five suitable verified rooms for one regional run; one personalized initial pitch plus up to two suitable follow-ups per room during four weeks; reply/hold/confirmed-date tracking, a full contact ledger and final report. Client approves artist terms and targets before sending.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act and one regional run; 25 distinct suitable rooms, one initial pitch plus two follow-ups per room over four weeks.
- Pages, words and records
- One act and one regional run; 25 distinct suitable rooms, one initial pitch plus two follow-ups per room over four weeks.
- Formats
- Personalized pitches, hold/confirmed-date sheet, contact ledger and final report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute midpoint review.
- Client inputs
- EPK, date range, draw/genre evidence, approved artist terms and target list authorization.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 4 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated initial pitch/list revisions before sending; factual corrections to tracking records.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- No guaranteed bookings or fees; 25 distinct rooms, not 25 emails. Artist/venue contracts, deposits, travel and show operations excluded.
These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBooking Outreach Campaign for a Regional Run$3,200 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 booking outreach campaign for a regional run package: Twenty-five suitable verified rooms for one regional run; one personalized initial pitch plus up to two suitable follow-ups per room during four weeks; reply/hold/confirmed-date tracking, a full contact ledger and final report. Client approves artist terms and targets before sending.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act and one regional run; 25 distinct suitable rooms, one initial pitch plus two follow-ups per room over four weeks.
- Pages, words and records
- One act and one regional run; 25 distinct suitable rooms, one initial pitch plus two follow-ups per room over four weeks.
- Formats
- Personalized pitches, hold/confirmed-date sheet, contact ledger and final report.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute midpoint review.
- Client inputs
- EPK, date range, draw/genre evidence, approved artist terms and target list authorization.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 4 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated initial pitch/list revisions before sending; factual corrections to tracking records.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- No guaranteed bookings or fees; 25 distinct rooms, not 25 emails. Artist/venue contracts, deposits, travel and show operations excluded.
These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,200 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Radio Promo CampaignTouring & BookingIncluded scope and billingRadio Promo Campaign$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 radio promo campaign package: One single; radio one-sheet, up to 25 qualified programs/stations, one personalized servicing email and up to 2 suitable follow-ups; target/delivery/response ledger and known airplay log.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One single; 25 suitable programs/stations, one servicing email and two follow-up attempts per target.
- Pages, words and records
- One single; 25 suitable programs/stations, one servicing email and two follow-up attempts per target.
- Formats
- Radio one-sheet, delivery/response ledger and verified airplay log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute release/format briefing and one 30-minute report review.
- Client inputs
- Clean mastered single, broadcast metadata, rights authority, release schedule and approved target list.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 6 weeks, timed to a release. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated one-sheet/pitch revisions before servicing.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Editorial airplay remains a station decision. Paid placement, required sponsorship notices, tracking vendors and music licenses excluded; paid play is not implied.
How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingRadio Promo Campaign$3,800 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 radio promo campaign package: One single; radio one-sheet, up to 25 qualified programs/stations, one personalized servicing email and up to 2 suitable follow-ups; target/delivery/response ledger and known airplay log.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One single; 25 suitable programs/stations, one servicing email and two follow-up attempts per target.
- Pages, words and records
- One single; 25 suitable programs/stations, one servicing email and two follow-up attempts per target.
- Formats
- Radio one-sheet, delivery/response ledger and verified airplay log.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 45-minute release/format briefing and one 30-minute report review.
- Client inputs
- Clean mastered single, broadcast metadata, rights authority, release schedule and approved target list.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 6 weeks, timed to a release. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated one-sheet/pitch revisions before servicing.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Editorial airplay remains a station decision. Paid placement, required sponsorship notices, tracking vendors and music licenses excluded; paid play is not implied.
How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $3,800 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Tour Routing and Advance PackTouring & BookingIncluded scope and billingTour Routing and Advance Pack$5,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 tour routing and advance pack package: One tour of up to 15 stops over three weeks: route, driving times/rest days, tracked calendar holds, day contacts and one advance sheet per stop; one consolidated venue clarification per stop and two route/advance revision rounds.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One tour up to 15 stops over three weeks; one route and one advance sheet per stop.
- Pages, words and records
- One tour up to 15 stops over three weeks; one route and one advance sheet per stop.
- Formats
- Route/drive/rest plan, holds ledger, 15 advance sheets and day-of contact sheet as XLSX/PDF.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute route briefing and two 30-minute advance reviews.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed offers, performer travel constraints, rider, payout terms and venue decision-maker contacts.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 4 weeks before the run. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated route/advance revisions before final itinerary.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Travel/hotel purchases, day-of on-call coverage and performance guarantees excluded; artist supplies confirmed offers and production requirements.
How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingTour Routing and Advance Pack$5,000 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 tour routing and advance pack package: One tour of up to 15 stops over three weeks: route, driving times/rest days, tracked calendar holds, day contacts and one advance sheet per stop; one consolidated venue clarification per stop and two route/advance revision rounds.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One tour up to 15 stops over three weeks; one route and one advance sheet per stop.
- Pages, words and records
- One tour up to 15 stops over three weeks; one route and one advance sheet per stop.
- Formats
- Route/drive/rest plan, holds ledger, 15 advance sheets and day-of contact sheet as XLSX/PDF.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute route briefing and two 30-minute advance reviews.
- Client inputs
- Confirmed offers, performer travel constraints, rider, payout terms and venue decision-maker contacts.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 4 weeks before the run. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated route/advance revisions before final itinerary.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- Travel/hotel purchases, day-of on-call coverage and performance guarantees excluded; artist supplies confirmed offers and production requirements.
How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $5,000 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Booking Outreach Campaign for the Texas CircuitTouring & BookingIncluded scope and billingBooking Outreach Campaign for the Texas Circuit$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 booking outreach campaign for the texas circuit package: Seventy-five suitable verified Texas rooms; one personalized initial pitch and two suitable follow-ups per room during eight weeks; reply triage, holds, routing suggestions, permanent contact ledger and final report. Client approves artist terms and targets before sending.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act; 75 distinct suitable Texas rooms, one personalized initial pitch and two follow-ups per room over eight weeks.
- Pages, words and records
- One act; 75 distinct suitable Texas rooms, one personalized initial pitch and two follow-ups per room over eight weeks.
- Formats
- Pitch/contact ledger, holds/routing suggestions and final report; developed contacts supplied to client.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute kickoff, two 30-minute progress reviews and one 30-minute final review.
- Client inputs
- EPK, Texas date availability, draw/genre evidence, artist terms and approved targets.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated initial pitch/target revisions; factual correction of route/hold records.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- 75 distinct qualified rooms, not 75 recipients. Bounced targets replaced where feasible within accepted window. Bookings, guarantees, contracts, show operations and travel excluded.
How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingBooking Outreach Campaign for the Texas Circuit$6,300 one time Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 booking outreach campaign for the texas circuit package: Seventy-five suitable verified Texas rooms; one personalized initial pitch and two suitable follow-ups per room during eight weeks; reply triage, holds, routing suggestions, permanent contact ledger and final report. Client approves artist terms and targets before sending.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- One act; 75 distinct suitable Texas rooms, one personalized initial pitch and two follow-ups per room over eight weeks.
- Pages, words and records
- One act; 75 distinct suitable Texas rooms, one personalized initial pitch and two follow-ups per room over eight weeks.
- Formats
- Pitch/contact ledger, holds/routing suggestions and final report; developed contacts supplied to client.
- Meetings and sessions
- One 60-minute kickoff, two 30-minute progress reviews and one 30-minute final review.
- Client inputs
- EPK, Texas date availability, draw/genre evidence, artist terms and approved targets.
- Approval
- One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
- Delivery
- 8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
- Revision rounds
- Two consolidated initial pitch/target revisions; factual correction of route/hold records.
- Rights and licensing
- Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
- Change requests
- Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
- Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
- Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
- Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.
Separate costs and exclusions- 75 distinct qualified rooms, not 75 recipients. Bounced targets replaced where feasible within accepted window. Bookings, guarantees, contracts, show operations and travel excluded.
How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins. How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,300 one time | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Scope inquiryThe IMC MachineIncluded scope and billingThe IMC Machine For Local Artist Tour TenantsArchived offer — existing agreements retained Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed. Included deliverables- 1 local-tour tenant: One act and one tour leg across up to 8 cities; booking hold/confirmation calendar, run-of-show and load-in records, campaign drafts and settlement references.
- 8 city campaign workspaces: Per city: one release draft up to 600 words, 1 original poster with square/portrait/story adaptations, 1 email draft up to 250 words; client operates enabled tools and approves outputs.
- 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review of up to 4 consolidated account/workflow issues; no booking outreach, travel or managed dispatch included.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 act, 1 tenant, 2 operators, 8 cities and 8 named venues per accepted tour leg
- Pages, words and records
- 8 event records/month; 8 campaign builds; no unlimited multi-city or multi-date entitlement for new orders
- Formats
- Configured calendar, PDF/CSV run and settlement records, supplied-media JPG/PNG templates and editable copy
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- 10–15 business days for proposal after complete facts; event production schedule quoted; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingThe IMC Machine For Local Artist Tour TenantsArchived offer — existing agreements retained Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed. Included deliverables- 1 local-tour tenant: One act and one tour leg across up to 8 cities; booking hold/confirmation calendar, run-of-show and load-in records, campaign drafts and settlement references.
- 8 city campaign workspaces: Per city: one release draft up to 600 words, 1 original poster with square/portrait/story adaptations, 1 email draft up to 250 words; client operates enabled tools and approves outputs.
- 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review of up to 4 consolidated account/workflow issues; no booking outreach, travel or managed dispatch included.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 act, 1 tenant, 2 operators, 8 cities and 8 named venues per accepted tour leg
- Pages, words and records
- 8 event records/month; 8 campaign builds; no unlimited multi-city or multi-date entitlement for new orders
- Formats
- Configured calendar, PDF/CSV run and settlement records, supplied-media JPG/PNG templates and editable copy
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- 10–15 business days for proposal after complete facts; event production schedule quoted; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Archived offer — existing agreements retained | Scope inquiry |
|---|
Scope inquiryThe IMC MachineIncluded scope and billingThe IMC Machine For Criminal Defense, Solo PractitionerArchived offer — existing agreements retained Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed. Included deliverables- 1 criminal defense platform tenant: Access to the contracted case workspace, supported evidence intake/indexing, review gates and campaign tools; exact enabled modules demonstrated at acceptance.
- 1 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
- 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 10 matters, 1000 document pages, 600 source-media minutes, 50 GB storage and 2 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
- 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 tenant, 1 included professional seat; named offices and roles in order
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed monthly envelope: 10 matters, 1000 pages, 600 media minutes, 50 GB, 2 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
- Formats
- Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
- Approval
- Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
- Delivery
- Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingThe IMC Machine For Criminal Defense, Solo PractitionerArchived offer — existing agreements retained Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed. Included deliverables- 1 criminal defense platform tenant: Access to the contracted case workspace, supported evidence intake/indexing, review gates and campaign tools; exact enabled modules demonstrated at acceptance.
- 1 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
- 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 10 matters, 1000 document pages, 600 source-media minutes, 50 GB storage and 2 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
- 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 tenant, 1 included professional seat; named offices and roles in order
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed monthly envelope: 10 matters, 1000 pages, 600 media minutes, 50 GB, 2 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
- Formats
- Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
- Approval
- Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
- Delivery
- Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Archived offer — existing agreements retained | Scope inquiry |
|---|
The IMC Machine For Civil Practice, Solo PractitionerThe IMC MachineIncluded scope and billingThe IMC Machine For Civil Practice, Solo Practitioner$625 / month + $6,300 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 civil-practice platform tenant: One civil attorney account with the enabled evidence, draft-review and marketing modules documented at onboarding; no legal analysis or managed campaign production is included.
- 1 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
- 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 10 matters, 1000 document pages, 600 source-media minutes, 50 GB storage and 2 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
- 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 tenant, 1 included professional seat; named offices and roles in order
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed monthly envelope: 10 matters, 1000 pages, 600 media minutes, 50 GB, 2 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
- Formats
- Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
- Approval
- Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
- Delivery
- Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax. Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingThe IMC Machine For Civil Practice, Solo Practitioner$625 / month + $6,300 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 civil-practice platform tenant: One civil attorney account with the enabled evidence, draft-review and marketing modules documented at onboarding; no legal analysis or managed campaign production is included.
- 1 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
- 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 10 matters, 1000 document pages, 600 source-media minutes, 50 GB storage and 2 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
- 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 tenant, 1 included professional seat; named offices and roles in order
- Pages, words and records
- Proposed monthly envelope: 10 matters, 1000 pages, 600 media minutes, 50 GB, 2 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
- Formats
- Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
- Approval
- Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
- Delivery
- Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax. Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $625 / month + $6,300 setup | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Scope inquiryThe IMC MachineIncluded scope and billingThe IMC Machine For Small Independent VenuesArchived offer — existing agreements retained Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed. Included deliverables- 1 small independent venue tenant: One venue under 300 seats; booking, run-of-show, hospitality, guest-list and marketing workspaces as enabled and demonstrated at onboarding. Client operates the tools.
- 3 operator seats maximum: Proposed new-order allowance; one named approval owner.
- 16 performance records per month maximum: Venue calendar, approved menu/room references, performance record and guest-message campaign drafts. Proposed reference envelope; final actual entitlements in signed order.
- 4 campaign builds per month maximum: Each one release up to 600 words, 4 original graphic concepts × 2 format renditions = 8 exports total: 4 primary portrait files and 4 derivative story files (1080×1350 and 1080×1920) and one 12-second loop from cleared supplied media; platform-generated drafts, no managed posting. Proposed allowance.
- 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review, up to 4 consolidated issues and usage check.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 venue under 300 seats, 1 tenant, 3 operators, 2 approved communications destinations
- Pages, words and records
- 16 performance records/month; 50 GB stored media, 4 campaigns/month proposed
- Formats
- Configured records, CSV calendar, PDF review; graphics 1080×1350/1080×1920; 12-second MP4; podcast WAV/MP3 only where included
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Onboarding 2–4 business weeks; monthly record/campaign schedule agreed after inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingThe IMC Machine For Small Independent VenuesArchived offer — existing agreements retained Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed. Included deliverables- 1 small independent venue tenant: One venue under 300 seats; booking, run-of-show, hospitality, guest-list and marketing workspaces as enabled and demonstrated at onboarding. Client operates the tools.
- 3 operator seats maximum: Proposed new-order allowance; one named approval owner.
- 16 performance records per month maximum: Venue calendar, approved menu/room references, performance record and guest-message campaign drafts. Proposed reference envelope; final actual entitlements in signed order.
- 4 campaign builds per month maximum: Each one release up to 600 words, 4 original graphic concepts × 2 format renditions = 8 exports total: 4 primary portrait files and 4 derivative story files (1080×1350 and 1080×1920) and one 12-second loop from cleared supplied media; platform-generated drafts, no managed posting. Proposed allowance.
- 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review, up to 4 consolidated issues and usage check.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 venue under 300 seats, 1 tenant, 3 operators, 2 approved communications destinations
- Pages, words and records
- 16 performance records/month; 50 GB stored media, 4 campaigns/month proposed
- Formats
- Configured records, CSV calendar, PDF review; graphics 1080×1350/1080×1920; 12-second MP4; podcast WAV/MP3 only where included
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Onboarding 2–4 business weeks; monthly record/campaign schedule agreed after inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Archived offer — existing agreements retained | Scope inquiry |
|---|
Recurring Programming, StudioThe IMC MachineIncluded scope and billingRecurring Programming, Studio$1,300 / month + $1,900 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 scheduled-programming account: One studio room (up to 30 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
- 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
- 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
- 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 studio room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
- Pages, words and records
- 20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
- Formats
- Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingRecurring Programming, Studio$1,300 / month + $1,900 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 scheduled-programming account: One studio room (up to 30 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
- 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
- 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
- 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 studio room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
- Pages, words and records
- 20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
- Formats
- Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,300 / month + $1,900 setup | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Recurring Programming, LoungeThe IMC MachineIncluded scope and billingRecurring Programming, Lounge$1,800 / month + $1,900 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 scheduled-programming account: One lounge room (30–200 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
- 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
- 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
- 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 lounge room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
- Pages, words and records
- 20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
- Formats
- Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingRecurring Programming, Lounge$1,800 / month + $1,900 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 scheduled-programming account: One lounge room (30–200 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
- 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
- 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
- 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 lounge room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
- Pages, words and records
- 20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
- Formats
- Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $1,800 / month + $1,900 setup | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Recurring Programming, BroadcastThe IMC MachineIncluded scope and billingRecurring Programming, Broadcast$2,500 / month + $1,900 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 scheduled-programming account: One broadcast room (online/livestream/virtual capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
- 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
- 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
- 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 broadcast room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
- Pages, words and records
- 20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
- Formats
- Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingRecurring Programming, Broadcast$2,500 / month + $1,900 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 scheduled-programming account: One broadcast room (online/livestream/virtual capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
- 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
- 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
- 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 broadcast room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
- Pages, words and records
- 20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
- Formats
- Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,500 / month + $1,900 setup | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Recurring Programming, PlayhouseThe IMC MachineIncluded scope and billingRecurring Programming, Playhouse$2,500 / month + $1,900 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 scheduled-programming account: One playhouse room (200–600 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
- 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
- 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
- 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 playhouse room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
- Pages, words and records
- 20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
- Formats
- Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingRecurring Programming, Playhouse$2,500 / month + $1,900 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 scheduled-programming account: One playhouse room (200–600 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
- 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
- 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
- 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 playhouse room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
- Pages, words and records
- 20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
- Formats
- Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $2,500 / month + $1,900 setup | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Recurring Programming, HallThe IMC MachineIncluded scope and billingRecurring Programming, Hall$4,400 / month + $1,900 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 scheduled-programming account: One hall room (600–1,200 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
- 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
- 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
- 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 hall room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
- Pages, words and records
- 20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
- Formats
- Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingRecurring Programming, Hall$4,400 / month + $1,900 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 scheduled-programming account: One hall room (600–1,200 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
- 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
- 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
- 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 hall room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
- Pages, words and records
- 20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
- Formats
- Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $4,400 / month + $1,900 setup | View Scope ↗ |
|---|
Recurring Programming, TheaterThe IMC MachineIncluded scope and billingRecurring Programming, Theater$6,300 / month + $1,900 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 scheduled-programming account: One theater room (1,200–2,500 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
- 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
- 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
- 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 theater room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
- Pages, words and records
- 20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
- Formats
- Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | Included quantities, delivery and billingRecurring Programming, Theater$6,300 / month + $1,900 setup Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Included deliverables- 1 scheduled-programming account: One theater room (1,200–2,500 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
- 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
- 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
- 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
- Platforms, accounts and locations
- 1 theater room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
- Pages, words and records
- 20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
- Formats
- Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
- Meetings and sessions
- Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
- Client inputs
- Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
- Approval
- Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
- Delivery
- Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
- Revision rounds
- One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
- Rights and licensing
- Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
- Change requests
- Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
- Included fee and external costs
- The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
- New-order scope boundary
- These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.
Delivery milestones- Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
- Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
- Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
- Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.
Separate costs and exclusions- Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
- Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
- Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.
How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work. | $6,300 / month + $1,900 setup | View Scope ↗ |
|---|